Mitsubishi Q00CPU Скачать руководство пользователя страница 142 | Manualshive

Страница: 142 / 976

background image

3

- 44

3.3 Settings for Creation and Execution of Multiple Sequence Programs
3.3.4 Stand-by type program

3

SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND

EXECUTION CONDITIONS

3.3.4 Stand-by type program

Note22

(1) Definition of stand-by type program

A stand-by type program is executed only when its execution is requested.
It can also be changed to another execution type by a sequence program instruction.

(2) Applications of stand-by type program

The stand-by type program is used in the following applications.

(a) Library of programs

This application is used to set a subroutine program and an interrupt program as a
stand-by type program and manage it separately from the main routine program.
Multiple subroutine programs and interrupt programs can also be created in a
single stand-by type program.

(b) Program setup change

This is applicable when only a necessary program is to be executed among pre-
created programs corresponding to all systems.
For example, the program preset as a stand-by (wait) in the PLC parameter dialog
box can be changed to a scan execution type program and executed by a
sequence program.

Note22

Figure 3.38 Library of programs using stand-by type program

Basic

Note3.23

The stand-by type program is not available for the Basic model QCPU.

Basic

P100

I0

P100

I0

Scan execution type program

Scan execution type program

Stand-by type program

Main routine

program

Subroutine

program

Interrupt
program

Main routine

program

Subroutine

program

Interrupt
program

«
...
140
141
142
143
144
...
»

Содержание Q00CPU

Страница 1: ......

Страница 2: ......

Страница 3: ...N Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DANGER CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury...

Страница 4: ...put in either of cases a and b In addition all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller Build a fail safe circuit exterior to the PLC that will make sure the equipment operates safely at such times Refer to LOADING AND INSTALLATION in QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for example fail safe circuits 3 O...

Страница 5: ...l always operate safely Also before exercising other control program change operating status change status control on the running PLC read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit i...

Страница 6: ...bles be sure that the base unit and the extension module connectors are installed correctly After installation check them for looseness Poor connections could cause an input or output failure Securely load the memory card into the memory card loading connector After installation check for lifting Poor connections could cause an operation fault Completely turn off the externally supplied power used...

Страница 7: ...ing wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work be sure that the module s terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock ...

Страница 8: ...ose it could result in short circuits fire or erroneous operation Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation The module has an ingress prevention label ...

Страница 9: ...ttery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires Switch off all phases of the externally supplied power used in the system when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws Not doing so could result in electric shock Undertightening of terminal screws can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening of screws can cause damages to the...

Страница 10: ... while power is on in the system that uses the CPU module compatible with online module change or on the MELSECNET H remote I O station Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be changed online while power is on and each module has its predetermined changing procedure For details refer to QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection and the online module change se...

Страница 11: ... Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 8 for details of the controlled models ...

Страница 12: ... 2 9 3 3 9 10 1 9 13 1 10 1 2 10 1 3 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Aug 2005 SH NA 080484ENG D Section 6 27 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Chapter 2 Section 3 9 3 5 1 1 5 1 4 9 1 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Oct 2005 SH NA 080484ENG E Section 6 12 3 Section 6 15 2 8 1 2 10 1 3 Appendix 4 Mar 2006 SH NA 080484ENG F QA65B QA68B GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 1 1 2 4 3 4 7 2 5 2 7 5 4 3 5 4 4 6 17 6 21 2 6...

Страница 13: ...24 6 25 6 26 6 28 Chapter 7 Section 7 1 7 1 2 7 1 4 7 2 Chapter 8 Section 8 1 2 8 2 8 3 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 4 9 2 5 9 2 7 9 2 8 9 2 9 9 2 10 9 2 11 9 2 13 9 2 14 9 3 1 9 3 2 9 3 3 9 4 9 5 1 9 6 3 9 6 4 9 7 9 10 1 9 11 1 9 11 2 9 11 3 9 12 2 9 12 3 9 13 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 3 10 1 4 11 2 11 2 1 11 2 2 11 2 3 11 2 4 11 2 5 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 4 2 Appendix 4 4 Appendix 6 May 2007 ...

Страница 14: ...Section 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 4 1 3 4 4 3 5 3 8 4 1 4 2 4 3 5 1 5 5 2 1 5 2 3 5 2 7 5 4 3 5 4 4 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 5 6 6 1 6 6 3 6 5 6 6 3 6 11 6 11 1 6 11 3 6 11 4 6 12 3 6 13 3 6 14 6 15 6 15 1 6 17 6 19 1 6 19 2 6 20 6 22 3 6 22 4 6 26 6 29 6 30 Chapter7 Chapter 9 Section 9 1 1 9 1 2 9 3 9 4 10 1 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 5 10 2 7 10 2 8 10 2 13 10 2 14 10 4 10 7 2 10 7 4 10 10 10 1...

Страница 15: ...ICATION 2 1 to 2 20 2 1 Basic model QCPU 2 1 2 2 High performance model QCPU 2 4 2 3 Process CPU 2 8 2 4 Redundant CPU 2 12 2 5 Universal model QCPU 2 16 CHAPTER3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION AND EXECUTION CONDITIONS 3 1 to 3 92 3 1 Sequence Program 3 3 3 1 1 Main routine programs 3 7 3 1 2 Subroutine programs 3 9 3 1 3 Interrupt programs 3 12 3 2 Settings for Execution of Only One Sequence Prog...

Страница 16: ...BCD Binary Coded Decimal 3 85 3 9 4 Real numbers Floating point data 3 86 3 10 Character String Data 3 92 CHAPTER4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT 4 1 to 4 34 4 1 Relationship between Number of Slots and Main Base Unit 4 1 4 2 Relationship between No of Extension Stages and No of Slots 4 2 4 3 Installing Extension Base Units and Setting the Number of Stages 4 4 4 4 Base Unit Assignment Base Mode 4 10 4 5 De...

Страница 17: ...4 3 Memory capacities of files 5 67 5 4 4 File size units 5 72 CHAPTER6 FUNCTIONS 6 1 to 6 214 6 1 Function List 6 1 6 2 Constant scan 6 5 6 3 Latch Function 6 10 6 4 Setting Output Y Status when Changing between STOP and RUN 6 15 6 5 Clock Function 6 18 6 6 Remote Operation 6 23 6 6 1 Remote RUN STOP 6 23 6 6 2 Remote PAUSE 6 27 6 6 3 Remote RESET 6 30 6 6 4 Remote latch clear 6 34 6 6 5 Relation...

Страница 18: ... 2 Remote password 6 150 6 20 CPU Module System Display by GX Developer 6 156 6 21 LED Display 6 161 6 21 1 Method to turn off the LED 6 162 6 21 2 Priority setting 6 163 6 22 High Speed Interrupt Function 6 166 6 22 1 High speed interrupt program execution 6 168 6 22 2 High speed I O refresh high speed buffer transfer 6 170 6 22 3 Processing times 6 173 6 22 4 Restrictions 6 175 6 23 Interrupt fr...

Страница 19: ... Function Module 8 11 CHAPTER9 PARAMETERS 9 1 to 9 41 9 1 PLC Parameters 9 2 9 1 1 Basic model QCPU 9 2 9 1 2 High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU 9 14 9 2 Redundant Parameter 9 33 9 3 Network Parameters 9 35 9 4 Remote Password 9 41 CHAPTER10 DEVICE EXPLANATION 10 1 to 10 124 10 1 Device List 10 1 10 2 Internal User Devices 10 6 10 2 1 Input X 10 10 10 2 2 Ou...

Страница 20: ...W 10 84 10 9 Nesting N 10 90 10 10 Pointer P 10 91 10 10 1 Local pointer 10 93 10 10 2 Common pointer 10 95 10 11 Interrupt pointer I 10 98 10 11 1 List of interrupt pointer Nos and interrupt factors 10 100 10 12 Other Devices 10 107 10 12 1 SFC block device BL 10 107 10 12 2 SFC transition device TR 10 107 10 12 3 Network No designation device J 10 107 10 12 4 I O No designation device U 10 108 1...

Страница 21: ...odel QCPU App 112 Appendix 5 1 PRECAUTIONS FOR REPLACEMENT App 112 Appendix 5 2 APPLICABLE DEVICES AND SOFTWARE App 119 Appendix 5 3 INSTRUCTIONS App 123 Appendix 5 3 1 Instructions not Supported in Universal Model QCPU and Alternative Methods App 123 Appendix 5 3 2 Replacing Programs Using Multiple CPU Transmission Dedicated Instructions App 125 Appendix 5 3 3 Program Replacement Examples App 126...

Страница 22: ...e Time of Writing Program 4 2 3 Reset Operation 4 2 4 Latch Clear Operation 4 3 High Performance Model QCPU Process CPU and Redundant CPU 4 3 1 Part Names 4 3 2 Switch Operation at the Time of Writing Program 4 3 3 Reset Operation 4 3 4 Latch Clear Operation 4 3 5 Automatic Writing to Standard ROM 4 4 Universal Model QCPU 4 4 1 Part Names 4 4 2 Switch Operation at the Time of Writing Program 4 4 3...

Страница 23: ...AT 7 2 1 Battery Specifications 7 2 2 Installation of Battery CHAPTER8 CPU MODULE START UP PROCEDURES CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 9 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 9 1 1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive 9 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive 9 1 3 Cables 9 1 4 Power Supply Module and Q00JCPU s Power Supply Part 9 1 5 When Using MELSEC A Series Modules ...

Страница 24: ...or when the MODE LED does not turn on 12 2 4 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering 12 2 5 Flowchart for when the POWER LED turns off 12 2 6 Flowchart for when the POWER LED turns on red 12 2 7 Flowchart for when the RUN LED turned off 12 2 8 When the RUN LED is flickering 12 2 9 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering 12 2 10 When the USER LED is turned on 12 2 11 When the BAT LED ...

Страница 25: ...e change 12 4 2 Change of redundant power supply module 12 5 I O Module Troubleshooting 12 5 1 Input circuit troubleshooting 12 5 2 Output Circuit Troubleshooting 12 6 Built in Ethernet Port Diagnosis 12 7 Special Relay List 12 8 Special Register List APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions Appendix 1 1 CPU module Appendix 1 2 Power supply module Appendix 1 3 Main base unit Appendix 1 4 Extensio...

Страница 26: ...n CPU No 1 is Basic model QCPU 3 1 2 When CPU No 1 is High Performance model QCPU or Process CPU 3 1 3 When CPU No 1 is Universal model QCPU 3 2 CPU No of CPU module 3 3 Concept of I O number assignment 3 3 1 I O number assignment of each module 3 3 2 I O number of each CPU module 3 4 Access range of CPU module and other modules 3 4 1 Access range with controlled module 3 4 2 Access range with non...

Страница 27: ...g processing time CHAPTER6 PARAMETER ADDED FOR MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM 6 1 Parameter list 6 1 1 Number of CPUs setting 6 1 2 Operating mode setting 6 1 3 Online module change setting 6 1 4 I O settings outside of the group 6 1 5 Communication area setting Refresh setting 6 1 6 Control CPU settings 6 1 7 Multiple CPU synchronized boot up 6 1 8 Multiple CPU high speed transmission area setting CHAPTER7 ...

Страница 28: ...A 26 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Transportation Precautions Appendix 1 1Controlled models Appendix 1 2Transport guidelines INDEX ...

Страница 29: ... SYSTEM 4 1 Mounting Modules 4 2 Wiring 4 3 Module Initial Settings 4 4 Confirming that the Power Supply is ON 4 5 Confirming System A System B 4 6 Starting up Connecting GX Developer 4 7 Writing Parameters and Programs to CPU 4 8 Restarting System A and System B 4 9 Error Check 4 10 Confirming the Control System Standby System 4 11 Running CPU Modules CHAPTER5 REDUNDANT SYSTEM FUNCTIONS 5 1 Basic...

Страница 30: ...Change Hot Swapping 5 9 Network Module Redundant Group Settings 5 10 Redundant CPU Functions Restricted in Redundant System 5 10 1 Enforced ON OFF of external I O 5 10 2 Remote Operation for Redundant System 5 11 Access to Module Mounted on Extension Base Unit CHAPTER6 REDUNDANT SYSTEM NETWORKS 6 1 Communication with GX Developer and PX Developer 6 1 1 Communication Methods with GX Developer 6 1 2...

Страница 31: ...CONTROL SYS DOWN error code 6310 to 6312 Occurred at Redundant System Startup 8 1 9 When ETX CABLE ERR Occurs 8 1 10 When BASE LAY ERROR Occurs 8 1 11 When UNIT LAY DIFF Occurs 8 1 12 When SP UNIT DOWN Occurs 8 1 13 When SP UNIT LAY ERROR Occurs 8 1 14 When LINK PARA ERROR Occurs 8 1 15 When SP UNIT VER ERR Occurs 8 1 16 When CAN T SWITCH Occurs to Control System CPU Module due to Communication Er...

Страница 32: ...Programs Appendix 4 4 Parameter Settings Appendix 4 5 Sample Program Appendix 5 Method for Starting up the Previous Control System Appendix 6 Precautions for Using Serial Communication Module Appendix 6 1 CSET Instruction Appendix 6 2 UINI Instruction Appendix 6 3 INPUT Instruction Appendix 6 4 PUTE Instruction Appendix 6 5 GETE Instruction Appendix 6 6 ONDEMAND Instruction Appendix 6 7 OUTPUT Ins...

Страница 33: ...80483ENG 13JR73 QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions This manual describes how to use the sequence instructions and application instructions Sold separately SH 080039 13JF58 QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC This manual explains the system configuration performance specifications functions programming debugging error codes and others of MELSAP3 Sold separately SH 08004...

Страница 34: ...ication methods and control procedures through the MC protocol for the external devices to read and write data from to the CPU module using the serial communication module Ethernet module Sold separately SH 080008 13JF89 Manual Name Manual Number Model Code QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions This manual describes the dedicated instructions used to exercise PID control S...

Страница 35: ...Manual Process Control Instructions This manual describes the programming procedures device names and other items necessary to implement PID control using process control instructions Sold separately SH 080316E 13JF67 Manual Name Manual Number Model Code QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System This manual explains the multiple CPU system overview system configuration I O numbers communication betwe...

Страница 36: ...quiring precautions are shown as icons Note under the icon corresponds to Note in the sentences and at the page bottom However Note is not described in the section title Chapter heading The index on the right side of the page shows the chapter of the open page at a glance Precautions Precautions corresponding to the icons are provided Section title The section of the open page is shown at a glance...

Страница 37: ...he following explanations POINT Explains the matters to be especially noted the functions and others related to the description Remark Provides the reference destination related to the description on that page and the convenient information ...

Страница 38: ...s Manual Multiple CPU System For the redundant system refer to the following manual QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 1 CHAPTER 1 Describes the overview of the CPU modules 2 CHAPTER 2 to 5 Describe the performance specifications executable programs I O numbers and memory of the CPU modules 3 CHAPTER 6 Describes the functions of the CPU modules 4 CHAPTER 7 Describes the functions using built ...

Страница 39: ...eneric term for Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU CPU module Generic term for Basic model QCPU High performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU Q series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series Programmable Controller AnS series Another name for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A Series Programmable Controller A series Another name for lar...

Страница 40: ...e can be mounted without power supply A6 B Generic term for A62B A65B and A68B extension base units on which A series I O module and special function module can be mounted QA6ADP Abbreviation for QA6ADP QA conversion adapter module QA6ADP A5 B A6 B Abbreviation for A large type extension base unit on which QA6ADP is mounted Main base unit Generic term for Q3 B Q3 SB Q3 RB and Q3 DB Extension base ...

Страница 41: ...e SRAM card Flash card Generic term for Q2MEM 2MBF and Q2MEM 4MBF type Flash card ATA card Generic term for Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA and Q2MEM 32MBA type ATA card Memory card Generic term for SRAM card Flash card and ATA card GOT Generic term for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT A series GOT F series and GOT1000 series PC CPU module MELSEC Q series compatible PC CPU module of Contec makes C...

Страница 42: ...ance and Inspection 1 CPU modules corresponding to the description of this manual The CPU modules described in this manual are as shown in Table1 1 Table1 1 List of CPU modules corresponding to the description of this manual CPU module Model name Basic model QCPU Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU High Performance model QCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Process CPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU...

Страница 43: ... s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Confirmation of part names and specifications of the CPU module Confirmation of connection methods for the power supply module base unit and I O module Construction of the single CPU system confirmation of start up procedure and I O number assignment Construction of th...

Страница 44: ...irmation of usage of sequence instructions basic instructions application instructions etc Confirmation of dedicated instructions for PID control Confirmation of MELSAP3 s system configuration performance specifications functions programming debugging and error codes Confirmation of the programming method specifications functions etc required for SFC programming of the MELSAP L type Confirmation o...

Страница 45: ...nual Multiple CPU System QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Confirmation of part names and specifications of the CPU module Confirmation of connection methods for power supply module base unit and I O module Construction of the single CPU system confirmation of start up procedure and I O number assignment Construction of the multiple CPU system confirmation of start up procedure and I O numbe...

Страница 46: ... Confirmation of usage of sequence instructions basic instructions application instructions etc Confirmation of dedicated instructions for PID control Confirmation of MELSAP3 s system configuration performance specifications functions programming debugging and error codes Confirmation of the programming method specifications functions etc required for SFC programming of the MELSAP L type Confirmat...

Страница 47: ...U System QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Confirmation of part names and specifications of the CPU module Confirmation of connection methods for power supply module base unit and I O module Construction of the single CPU system confirmation of start up procedure and I O number assignment Construction of the multiple CPU system confirmation of start up procedure and I O number assignment Con...

Страница 48: ...ion of usage of sequence instructions basic instructions application instructions etc Confirmation of dedicated instructions for process control Confirmation of MELSAP3 s system configuration performance specifications functions programming debugging and error codes Confirmation of the programming method specifications functions etc required for SFC programming of the MELSAP L type Confirmation of...

Страница 49: ...Fundamentals QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Confirmation of part names and specifications of the CPU module Confirmation of connection methods for power supply module base unit and I O module Construction of redundant system confirmation of start up procedure and I O number assignment Confirmation of the configuration and memory of sequence programs ...

Страница 50: ...nstructions basic instructions application instructions etc Confirmation of dedicated instructions for PID control Confirmation of dedicated instructions for process control Confirmation of MELSAP3 s system configuration performance specifications functions programming debugging and error codes Confirmation of the programming method specifications functions etc required for SFC programming of the ...

Страница 51: ...ultiple CPU System QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Confirmation of part names and specifications of the CPU module Confirmation of connection methods for power supply module base unit and I O module Construction of the single CPU system confirmation of start up procedure and I O number assignment Construction of the multiple CPU system confirmation of start up procedure and I O number assi...

Страница 52: ...onfirmation of usage of sequence instructions basic instructions application instructions etc Confirmation of dedicated instructions for PID control Confirmation of MELSAP3 s system configuration performance specifications functions programming debugging and error codes Confirmation of the programming method specifications functions etc required for SFC programming of the MELSAP L type Confirmatio...

Страница 53: ...atures of the CPU modules 1 1 1 Features of Basic model QCPU The features specific to the Basic model QCPU are described below 1 Cost performance optimum for small scaled system The Basic model QCPU is a module targeted for a small scaled system and optimum for controlling a simple compact system The Basic model QCPU realizes the cost performance optimum for a small scaled system Figure 1 1 System...

Страница 54: ...nterface in the MELSEC communication protocol hereinafter the MC protocol POINT New functions of a CPU module may be added depending on the upgrade of the serial number of the CPU module or the function version of GX Developer For the list of functions have been added with the upgrade of the Basic model QCPU refer to Appendix 4 1 Figure 1 2 Communication with personal computer and or display devic...

Страница 55: ...eatures specific to the High Performance model QCPU are described below 1 High performance and large capacity The High Performance model QCPU is a module targeted for small scaled to large scaled systems and capable of high speed massive data processing The High Performance model QCPU realizes construction of the optimum and high performance system Figure 1 3 System example using the High Performa...

Страница 56: ... B QA6 B and QA6ADP A5 B A6 B allow the High Performance model QCPU to use the AnS A series I O modules and special function modules POINT New functions of a CPU module may be added depending on the upgrade of the serial number of the CPU module or the function version of GX Developer For the list of functions have been added with the upgrade of the High Performance model QCPU refer to Appendix 4 ...

Страница 57: ...al for details of the added instructions QnPHCPU QnPRHCPU Programming Manual Process Control Instructions 2 Two degree of freedom PID control system The Two degree of freedom PID control system has been adopted to enable optimum responses to both set value changes and disturbance 3 Auto tuning function PID constant initial value setting The auto tuning function enables automatic control parameter ...

Страница 58: ...6 Supporting software package dedicated to process control Using the process control software package PX Developer PID control programs can be created easily with function blocks The combination of the Process CPU and the process control software package PX Developer offers an excellent engineering environment POINT 1 When using the Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU use GX Developer Version 7 10L or later Whe...

Страница 59: ...ng redundant system in addition to the Process CPU functions a Redundant system using Redundant CPU With the Redundant CPU a redundant system as a whole including base units power supply modules and CPU modules Redundant CPUs can be configured The redundant system realizes high reliability since the standby system takes over the control even if a failure occurs in the control system Figure 1 5 Ope...

Страница 60: ...with GX Developer Version When using the Redundant CPU use PX Developer Version 1 06G or later Refer to the PX Developer manual for details of PX Developer 3 New functions of a CPU module may be added depending on the upgrade of the serial number of the CPU module or the function version of GX Developer For the list of functions have been added with the upgrade of the Redundant CPU refer to Append...

Страница 61: ...points maximum when a memory card is used 2 can be set inside the CPU module 2 For the Q26UDHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU only 3 Use of double precision floating point operation instructions The double precision floating point operation instructions 64 bit instructions are newly added to the existing single precision floating point operation instructions Section 3 9 4 This enables more accurate analog contr...

Страница 62: ...es on the network such as internal LAN via routers b GX Developer direct connection simple connection Section 7 3 When connecting the Built in Ethernet port QCPU with GX Developer the direct connection simple connection which connects them using only one Ethernet cable not using a hub is available The direct connection enables communication with only specifying connection target IP address setting...

Страница 63: ...r time setting By synchronizing the Built in Ethernet port QCPU connected via Ethernet error occurrence order for each process can be checked and troubleshooting becomes easy Since time setting can be performed automatically at programmable controller CPU power ON the CPU module can start operation with accurate time data e File transfer function FTP Section 7 6 An external device with a FTP clien...

Страница 64: ...ligent function module parameters set by GX Configurator are included 4 The Q00JCPU does not have the standard RAM The file registers are unavailable 5 Refer to the following manual for the CPU shared memory QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System Note1 Figure 1 10 Memory configuration and storage destinations of Basic model QCPU Basic Note1 1 The Basic model QCPU does not support the use of a memo...

Страница 65: ...the sampling trace file is stored in the standard RAM check the version of the CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 5 Only available for the Flash card Only read is enabled in PLC program 6 Refer to the following manual for the CPU shared memory QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System 7 The Universal model QCPU cannot store an error history in the memory card 8 Can be stored only when the Univers...

Страница 66: ...out battery backup 1 Basic model QCPU To execute boot from the standard ROM to the program memory it is necessary to make boot file setting in the PLC Parameter dialog box of GX Developer Section 5 1 5 Figure 1 12 Execution of stored program Note2 Figure 1 13 Boot run of Basic model QCPU Program memory Parameter Program Device initial value Device comments Execution of program in program memory Fo...

Страница 67: ...per and set the parameter valid drive with DIP switches Note1 4 Section 5 2 9 Note3 Figure 1 14 Boot operation of High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU Note3 Universal UD Note1 3 Universal UD Note1 4 Program memory Boot Memory card Boot Standard ROM Execution of program booted from the standard ROM or memory card to the program memory Parameter Program Device i...

Страница 68: ...program 2 a in this section and file divided structuring 2 b in this section are available a Structuring in the same program Structuring in the same program is achieved by creating subroutine programs Section 3 1 2 or interrupt programs Section 3 1 3 Figure 1 15 Example of structuring in the same program P8 RET RET Y10 RET Y11 Y12 P0 P1 END FEND CALL P1 Main routine program Subroutine program 1 Su...

Страница 69: ...cording to the processes and functions If specifications are changed it is necessary to correct debug only the corresponding program 1 When program is created separately by multiple designers 2 The execution order and execution conditions of the program can be set by program setting Section 3 3 6 1 Note4 Figure 1 16 File divided structuring Figure 1 17 Separate creation of program by designers Bas...

Страница 70: ...ions of the program can be set by program setting Section 3 3 6 1 Figure 1 18 Separate creation of program by processes Figure 1 19 Separate creation of program by functions Split by process Program A Program B Program C Program D Program memory Standard ROM Memory card Program A to D are executed in sequence 2 Ship in Manufacturing Assembly Ship out Initial processing Main processing Communicatio...

Страница 71: ... Q series CPU modules allow devices to be specified flexibly a Word device bits are handled as contacts coils By specifying the bit of the word device each bit of the word device can be handled as a contact coil b Easy direct processing in 1 point units Using the direct access input DX and direct access output DY direct processing can be easily performed in 1 point units in a program Section 3 8 2...

Страница 72: ...5 Figure 1 22 Use of differential contact Figure 1 23 Direct access to intelligent function module buffer memory X0 X1 Y100 M0 X0 Y100 Y100 X1 Y100 Differential contact ON at leading edge of X0 M0 PLS X0 D0 U4 G12 P U4 G12 Readout of Q64AD buffer memory s address 12 data I O Nos X Y40 to X Y4f Buffer memory address designation Intelligent function module designation Input module Input module Input...

Страница 73: ...ect access to link devices Access can be made to the link device LX LY LB LW SB or SW of the CC Link IE controller network module and the MELSECNET H network module without the refresh setting Section 10 4 Figure 1 24 Direct access to link devices M0 J5 W12 Direct readout of the No 5 network module s LW12 link register Link register designation Network No designation D0 J5 W12 P Network No 5 QJ71L...

Страница 74: ...l numbers and character string constants X0 X1 PLS M0 M0 Y8 X10 X11 PLS M10 M10 Y18 X170 X171 PLS M170 M170 Y178 X0Z0 X1Z0 Y8Z2 FOR n NEXT V0Z1 n pieces of similar programs can be described at one time Basic Note1 6 X0 R0 D0 E1 23 E P D10 D5 P D0 D1 E3 45 R0 R1 E4 68 E1 23 D5 D6 D10 D11 D12 NUL 1 1 NUL D13 Real number ADD instruction Character string data LINK instruction Real number data Characte...

Страница 75: ...ber of program steps Programs can also be created and managed easily A subroutine program can be created and called in the same program Using a common pointer however a subroutine program in the other program can be also called Note1 7 Note6 Figure 1 28 Subroutine program sharing Figure 1 27 Data processing by table processing instruction Note6 X0 K2 R0 D0 FINSP R0 R1 R2 R3 3 10 20 30 R4 R0 R1 R2 ...

Страница 76: ...the input output condition of the argument Figure 1 29 Subroutine call instructions with arguments FD2 FD1 MOV SM400 FD2 FD0 MOV RET FEND END M0 M0 M10 R10 K4X10 W10 P0 CALLP P0 100 0 Subroutine program Always ON Argument from FD2 Argument to FD1 Argument to FD0 source data Destination data Argument designation M0 R0 K4X0 W0 P0 CALLP Argument from FD2 Argument to FD1 Argument to FD0 Argument desig...

Страница 77: ...e rating plate The rating plate is located on the side of the CPU module 2 Checking on the front of the module The serial number written on the rating plate is displayed on the front at the bottom of the module This display is not supported on the following CPU modules Modules manufactured in mid September 2007 or earlier Redundant CPUs manufactured in March 2008 or earlier Q00JCPU Remark Serial n...

Страница 78: ...on the rating plate of the module is displayed in the Product No column 1 Note that is displayed for a modules that does not support the product number display 1 The product number is displayed only for the Universal model QCPU POINT The serial number displayed on the Product information list screen of GX Developer may differ from that on the rating plate and on the front of the module The serial ...

Страница 79: ...4 1 4 The CPU shared memory is not latched QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System The CPU shared memory is cleared by turning on the PLC or resetting the CPU module Table2 1 Performance Specifications Item Basic model QCPU Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Control method Sequence program control method I O control mode Refresh mode Direct access I O is available by specifying direct access I O DX DY Program l...

Страница 80: ... The measurement unit of the low and high speed timers is set up by parameters Low speed timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit 100ms by default High speed timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms unit 10ms by default Retentive timer ST 6 0 point by default sharing of the low and high speed retentive timers changeable The low and high speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions The measurement unit of the low an...

Страница 81: ...he number of device points is fixed Special register SD 1024 points SD0 to 1023 The number of device points is fixed Function input FX 16 points FX0 to F The number of device points is fixed Function output FY 16 points FY0 to F The number of device points is fixed Function register FD 5 points FD0 to 4 The number of device points is fixed No of device tracking words Link direct device Device for ...

Страница 82: ... O control mode Refresh mode Direct access I O is available by specifying direct access I O DX DY Program language Sequence control language Relay symbol language logic symbolic language MELSAP3 SFC MELSAP L function block and structured text ST Process control language Processing speed sequence instruction LD X0 79ns 34ns MOV D0 D1 237ns 102ns Processing speed redundant function Tracking executio...

Страница 83: ...o FFF No of device points Internal relay M 8192 points by default M0 8191 changeable Latch relay L 8192 points by default L0 to 8191 changeable Link relay B 8192 points by default B0 to 1FFF changeable Timer T 2048 points by default T0 to 2047 sharing of low and high speed timers changeable The low and high speed timers are specified by the instructions The measurement unit of the low and high spe...

Страница 84: ...767 ZR Standard RAM 32768 points R0 to 32767 65536 point ZR0 to 65535 Block switching not required 131072 points ZR0 to 131071 Block switching not required SRAM card 1M bytes 517120 points ZR0 to 517119 Block switching not required SRAM card 2M bytes 1041408 points ZR0 to 1041407 Block switching not required Flash card 2M bytes 1041408 points ZR0 to 1041407 Block switching not required Flash card ...

Страница 85: ...r of device points is fixed Function register FD 5 points FD0 to 4 The number of device points is fixed No of device tracking words Link direct device Device for accessing the link device directly Dedicated to CC Link IE controller network and MELSECNET H Specified form J X J Y J W J B J SW J SB Intelligent function module device Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function m...

Страница 86: ...Refresh mode Program language Sequence control language Relay symbol language logic symbolic language MELSAP3 SFC MELSAP L function block and structured text ST Process control language FBD for process control Programming by PX Developer Processing speed sequence instruction LD X0 34ns MOV D0 D1 102ns Processing speed redundant function Tracking execution time extended scan time Constant scan Func...

Страница 87: ...nternal relay M 6 8192 points by default M0 to 8191 changeable Latch relay L 6 8192 points by default L0 to 8191 changeable Link relay B 6 8192 points by default B0 to 1FFF changeable Timer T 6 2048 points by default T0 to 2047 sharing of low and high speed timers changeable The low and high speed timers are specified by the instructions The measurement unit of the low and high speed timers is set...

Страница 88: ...s ZR0 to 131071 block switching not required 131072 points ZR0 to 131071 block switching not required SRAM card 1M bytes 517120 points ZR0 to 517119 block switching not required SRAM card 2M bytes 1041408 points ZR0 to 1041407 block switching not required Flash card 2M bytes 1041408 points ZR0 to 1041407 block switching not required Flash card 4M bytes 1042432 points ZR0 to 1042431 block switching...

Страница 89: ... is fixed Function register FD 5 points FD0 to 4 The number of device points is fixed No of device tracking words Link direct device Device for accessing the link device directly Exclusively used for CC Link IE controller network and MELSECNET H Specified form J X J Y J W J B J SW J SB Intelligent function module device Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module dire...

Страница 90: ...nguage logic symbolic language MELSAP3 SFC MELSAP L function block and structured text ST Process control language FBD for process control Processing speed sequence instruction LD X0 34ns MOV D0 D1 102ns Processing speed redundant function Tracking execution time extended scan time Device memory 48k words 10ms Device memory 100k words 15ms QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Constant scan Func...

Страница 91: ...ay M 5 8192 points by default M0 to 8191 changeable Latch relay L 5 8192 points by default L0 to 8191 changeable Link relay B 5 8192 points by default B0 to 1FFF changeable Timer T 5 2048 points by default T0 to 2047 sharing of low and high speed timers changeable The low and high speed timers are specified by the instructions The measurement unit of the low and high speed timers is set up by para...

Страница 92: ...k switching not required SRAM card 1M bytes 517120 points ZR0 to 517119 block switching not required SRAM card 2M bytes 1041408 points ZR0 to 1041407 block switching not required Flash card 2M bytes 1041408 points ZR0 to 1041407 block switching not required Flash card 4M bytes 1042432 points ZR0 to 1042431 block switching not required Link special relay SB 2048 points SB0 to 7FF The number of devi...

Страница 93: ...points FD0 to 4 The number of device points is fixed No of device tracking words Max 100k words QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Link direct device Device for accessing the link device directly Exclusively used for CC Link IE controller network and MELSECNET H Specified form J X J Y J W J B J SW J SB Intelligent function module device Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligen...

Страница 94: ...ay symbol language logic symbolic language MELSAP3 SFC MELSAP L function block and structured text ST Process control language Processing speed sequence instruction LD X0 40ns 20ns 9 5ns MOV D0 D1 80ns 40ns 19ns Processing speed redundant function Tracking execution time extended scan time Constant scan Function for keeping regular scan time 0 5 to 2000ms Setting available in 0 5ms unit Setting by...

Страница 95: ...of I O device points No of points usable on program 8192 points X Y0 to 1FFF No of I O points No of points accessible to the actual I O module 2048 points X Y0 to 7FF 4096 points X Y0 to FFF No of device points Internal relay M 7 8192 points by default M0 8191 changeable Latch relay L 7 8192 points by default L0 8191 changeable Link relay B 7 8192 points by default B0 to 1FFF changeable Timer T 7 ...

Страница 96: ...units of 32768 points SRAM card 8M bytes 32768 points R0 to 32767 Up to 4184064 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points Flash card 2M bytes 32768 points R0 to 32767 Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points Flash card 4M bytes 32768 points R0 to 32767 Up to 2087936 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points ZR Standard R...

Страница 97: ... 16 points FY0 to F The number of device points is fixed Function register FD 5 points FD0 to 4 The number of device points is fixed No of device tracking words Link direct device Device for accessing the link device directly Dedicated to CC Link IE controller network and MELSECNET H Specified form J X J Y J W J B J SW J SB Intelligent function module device Device for accessing the buffer memory ...

Страница 98: ...2 20 2 5 Universal model QCPU 2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION Remark For the general specifications refer to the following manual QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection ...

Страница 99: ...ITIONS There are three types of programs that can be executed in the CPU module sequence program SFC program and ST program This manual does not explain the SFC program and ST program Refer to the following manuals for the SFC program and ST program QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC QCPU Q Mode Programming Manual Structured Text 1 Program execution order of Basic model QCPU The Basic model...

Страница 100: ...e model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU or Universal model QCPU can store multiple programs Set the program execution order on the Program tab of PLC parameter in GX Developer Section 3 3 6 Figure 3 2 Program execution order of High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU or Universal model QCPU Execution order can be changed Initial processing I O module refresh processing Program operati...

Страница 101: ...module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module 3 1 Sequence Program Sequence program is a program created using sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions Remark Refer to the following manual for the sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Figure 3 3 Sequence program T0 X0 X1...

Страница 102: ...operating sequence programs which starts from the left side vertical bus bar and ends at the right side vertical bus bar b List mode When programming in the list mode the symbols such as contacts and coils used in the ladder mode are replaced with dedicated instructions The following instructions are used for normally open contacts normally closed contacts and coils Normally open contact LD AND OR...

Страница 103: ...ed sequentially from Step 0 to the END FEND instruction In the ladder mode operation is performed from the left side vertical bus bar to the right end for each ladder block and from the top rung to the bottom Figure 3 5 Comparison between ladder and list modes X0 X1 X5 X6 X7 X2 X3 X4 0 10 Ladder mode From left to right From top to bottom 1 to 11 indicate operation order of sequence program List mo...

Страница 104: ...ine program Section 3 1 1 Subroutine program Section 3 1 2 Interrupt program Section 3 1 3 Note1 Figure 3 6 Sequence program classification Note1 Basic Note3 1 FEND RET IRET END P0 I0 File A Main routine program Subroutine program Interrupt program Note3 1 Since the Basic model QCPU cannot execute multiple programs the file name is fixed to MAIN Basic Note3 1 MAIN P8 RET FEND RET Y10 RET END Y11 Y...

Страница 105: ... the END FEND instruction 2 Execution operation of main routine program When the main routine program is executed it operates as described below a When only one program is executed The main routine program is executed from Step 0 to the END FEND instruction where END processing is performed After the END processing the program restarts operation from Step 0 b When multiple programs are executed Th...

Страница 106: ...gram Section 3 3 4 Fixed scan execution type program Section 3 3 5 POINT When no execution type is set for execution of only one program Section 3 3 6 the main routine program operates as a scan execution type program Remark Refer to the following manual for details of the END FEND instruction QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Note2 Note3 Basic Note3 2 The Basic model QCPU ...

Страница 107: ...ram A subroutine program is a program section from a pointer P to the REET instruction The subroutine program is executed only when it is called by a subroutine program call instruction e g CALL P FCALL P from the main routine program 2 Subroutine program applications Using a subroutine program as described below reduces the number of program steps Changing a section which is executed several time...

Страница 108: ... routine program 1 Location of creating subroutine programs Create subroutine programs between the FEND and END instructions of the main routine program Note4 Figure 3 8 Subroutine programs Note4 Basic Note3 4 P8 RET RET Y10 RET END Y11 FEND Y12 P0 P1 Program A Main routine program Subroutine program Write File of program A Note3 4 Since the Basic model QCPU cannot execute multiple programs the fi...

Страница 109: ...Available pointers Local pointers and common pointers are available for subroutine programs Note3 5 Note5 Note that when a local pointer is used the subroutine program cannot be called from another program Section 10 10 Remark Refer to Section 10 9 for the nesting of subroutine programs b Managing subroutine program as another program Note3 6 Subroutine programs can be managed as one program Stand...

Страница 110: ...program of the interrupt pointer number corresponding to that factor is executed The interrupt program is executed only when the interrupt factor occurs Figure 3 9 Interrupt programs Figure 3 10 Interrupt program execution timing FEND EI IRET IRET END I0 I29 Main routine program I0 interrupt program I29 interrupt program Indicates end of main routine program Interrupt pointer Main routine program ...

Страница 111: ... of the above is executed the interrupt program of I49 cannot be executed in the preset interrupt cycles 2 Only one interrupt program can be created with one interrupt pointer number Remark Refer to Section 10 11 for details of the interrupt factors and interrupt pointers Note7 Note8 Basic Process Redundant Note3 7 Note3 7 Note3 7 Universal UD Note3 7 High Performance Note3 8 The pointer dedicated...

Страница 112: ...tween the FEND and END instructions of the main routine program Note9 2 Restrictions on creation order When creating multiple interrupt programs it is not necessary to set the interrupt pointer numbers in ascending order Figure 3 11 Interrupt programs Note9 Basic Note3 9 IRET IRET IRET I32 Y11 Y10 I0 Y12 I28 END FEND Program A Main routine program Interrupt program Interrupt pointer Write File of ...

Страница 113: ...terrupts a Basic model QCPU Execute the EI instruction to enable the interrupts b High Performance model QCPU Process CPU or Redundant CPU When executing interrupt programs of interrupt pointers I32 to 47 execute the IMASK and EI instructions to enable the interrupts The interrupt programs of interrupt pointers I0 to 31 or I48 to 255 can be executed after enabling the interrupts with the EI instru...

Страница 114: ...I127 are stored only once 2 High Performance model QCPU Process CPU or Redundant CPU Interrupt factors of I0 to 27 I28 to 31 I50 to 255 and in the fixed scan execution type program are stored only once For those of I32 to 41 and I49 if factors occurred in the interrupt disabled status they are discarded Also all factors occurred are discarded if they are masked by the IMASK instruction 3 Universal...

Страница 115: ...ligent Function Module b When interrupt factor occurs in STOP PAUSE status When an interrupt factor occurs in the STOP PAUSE status the CPU module execute the interrupt program corresponding to the interrupt factor as soon as an interrupts are enabled after the CPU module status changes to RUN Figure 3 13 When interrupt factor occurs in STOP PAUSE status Main routine program Interrupt program Inte...

Страница 116: ...errupt program for each stored interrupt factor is executed after completion of the current program execution Even if the same interrupt factor occurs several times the first one only is stored and those occurred after that are ignored Figure 3 14 When multiple interrupt factors occur simultaneously in interrupt enable status Figure 3 15 When the same interrupt factor as that of the interrupt prog...

Страница 117: ...rs of I32 to I41 and I49 are discarded 3 Universal model QCPU Interrupt factors of I0 to 15 I45 and I50 to 255 are stored only once and then the interrupt program of each stored interrupt factor is executed after completion of the current interrupt program execution For those of I28 to 31 and in the fixed scan execution type program all interrupt factors occurred are stored and then all the interr...

Страница 118: ...rupt occurs during link refresh link refresh is suspended and an interrupt program is executed Even if the cyclic data block has been assured for each station in the CC Link IE controller network or the MELSECNET H network system it is not available when the device set as a refresh target is used in the interrupt program In the interrupt program do not use the device set as the link refresh target...

Страница 119: ... program corresponding to the interrupt factor is executed 5 Save and restoration of index register data and file register No When an interrupt program is executed by default of the CPU module the index register data and file register block No are saved and restored at the time of switching between the scan execution type program low speed execution type program Note3 12 and the interrupt program ...

Страница 120: ...ther interrupt processing will not be executed Do not execute the EI DI instruction during interrupt program execution c Timers T and counters C Timers and counters are not available for interrupt programs The timers T and counters C update the current values and turn ON OFF the contacts when the OUT T and OUT C instructions are executed respectively Using a timer T and or a counter C in an interr...

Страница 121: ...ogram Note3 13 is executed to measure the scan time or execution time using special registers the time for the program is added to the measured time Note13 The values stored into the special registers and the monitor values measured times of GX Developer shown below increase when the program is executed 1 Basic model QCPU Special registers SD520 SD521 Current scan time SD524 SD525 Minimum scan tim...

Страница 122: ... SD543 Constant scan wait time SD544 SD545 Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programsNote3 14 SD546 SD547 Execution time for low speed execution type programs SD548 SD549 Scan execution type program execution time SD551 SD552 Service interval timeNote3 15 Monitor values of GX Developer Execution time measurement Scan time measurement Constant scan Note14 Note14 Universal UD Re...

Страница 123: ...rom the time when the CPU module starts the sequence program operation from Step 0 until it executes Step 0 of the same sequence program again The scan time consists of the sequence program execution time and the END processing time When either of the following programs is executed the execution time of that program is added to the scan time Interrupt program Fixed scan execution type programNote3...

Страница 124: ...RROR occurs within a scan time range of 10ms t 20ms b WDT Setting The WDT setting can be changed within a range of 10ms to 2000ms in the PLC RAS of the PLC parameter dialog box Setting unit 10ms Remark The execution time of the program being executed can be checked in the program list monitor of GX Developer Section 6 13 1 3 Function that repeats program at fixed intervals The constant scan functi...

Страница 125: ...n also be stored as a single program This enables programming to be shared by each designer for each processing unit 1 Refer to the following sections for the program storage location Basic model QCPU Section 5 1 1 High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU or Universal model QCPU Section 5 2 1 2 Settings required for execution of multiple programs When multiple programs are to be execu...

Страница 126: ...tion types The following program execution types can be set on the CPU module Initial execution type program Section 3 3 1 Scan execution type program Section 3 3 2 Low speed execution type program Section 3 3 3 Note3 18Note17 Stand by type program Section 3 3 4 Fixed scan execution type program Section 3 3 5 Note17 Redundant Universal UD Note3 18 Note3 18 The low speed execution type programs are...

Страница 127: ...ted only once when the PLC is powered ON or the STOP status is changed to the RUN status The initial execution type program can be used for a program that need not be executed from the next scan or later once it is executed e g initial processing for the intelligent function module Note18 Figure 3 21 When processing to be executed only once is separated as initial execution type program Basic Note...

Страница 128: ... time and stores it into the special registers SD522 SD523 The initial scan time can be checked by monitoring SD522 and SD523 Example When SD522 is 3 and SD523 is 400 the scan time is 3 4ms 2 Accuracy and measurement of initial scan time The accuracy of the initial scan time stored into the special registers is 0 1ms The measurement of the initial scan time is continued even if the watchdog timer ...

Страница 129: ...cution monitoring time A WDT ERROR occurs when the initial scan time exceeds the preset initial execution monitoring time The CPU module stops the operation POINT 1 When an initial execution type program and low speed execution type programNote3 20 are to be executed the low speed execution type program Section 3 3 3 is executed after completion of the initial execution type program Note19 As the ...

Страница 130: ...o Initial in the program of the PLC parameter dialog box When using multiple initial execution type programs register them in the order of execution b Initial execution monitoring time When watching the initial execution type program execution time set the initial execution monitoring time within a range of 10ms to 2000ms in the PLC RAS of the PLC parameter dialog box Setting unit 10ms Figure 3 24...

Страница 131: ...ssing time 1 Scan time storage places The CPU module measures the current value and minimum and maximum values of the scan time and stores them into the special registers SD520 SD521 SD524 to 527 The scan time can be checked by monitoring SD520 SD521 and SD524 to 527 Example When SD520 is 3 and SD521 is 400 the scan time is 3 4ms Note20 Figure 3 26 Execution order of scan execution type programs F...

Страница 132: ...ype programs are executed an END processing is performed and the first scan execution type program is executed again By placing the COM instruction at the end of each scan execution type program the END processing network refresh can be performed for each program c WDT Watchdog timer The watchdog timer hereafter abbreviated to the WDT watches the scan time The default value is 200ms 1 WDT error A ...

Страница 133: ...tion using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module 3 Settings for execution of scan execution type programs a Program Set the execution type to Scan in the program of the PLC parameter dialog box When using multiple scan execution type programs register them in the order of execution b WDT Setting When changing the WDT from the default value set the W...

Страница 134: ...ution time for the low speed execution type program Set the low speed program execution time Make the above settings in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter dialog box 4 in this section POINT When executing a low speed execution type program set either the constant scan or the low speed program execution time Note21 Figure 3 30 Low speed execution type program execution When executed during ex...

Страница 135: ...d 1 Low speed execution type programs are executed repeatedly during the excess time of constant scan Hence the low speed execution type program execution time differs between scans Figure 3 31 2 Low speed execution type programs are executed repeatedly during the preset low speed execution type program execution time Hence the scan time differs between scans Figure 3 33 3 The waiting time is the ...

Страница 136: ...tracking mode SM330 ON 0 5ms 2 5ms 0 5ms 13ms 8 5ms 8 5ms Scan execution type program Low speed execution type program A Low speed execution type program B Constant scan excess time Low speed scan time Low speed scan time Low speed scan time Low speed END processing execution Low speed END processing execution Low speed END processing execution 0 5ms 0 5ms 1ms 2ms 0 8 16 END processing 24 32 ms 4 ...

Страница 137: ...ed execution type program B 3ms END processing low speed END processing 0ms assumed to be 0ms for easy understanding Figure 3 33 Asynchronized tracking mode SM330 OFF Figure 3 34 Synchronized tracking mode SM330 ON 0 18 5 25 5 33 5 ms 4ms 1ms 2ms 4 5ms 1ms 4ms Low speed scan time 4 11 5 2ms 1ms 1ms 1ms 1ms 4ms 5ms 3ms Scan execution type program Low speed execution type program A Low speed executi...

Страница 138: ...pecial registers for low speed execution type programs 1 Online change hereafter online change refers to the operation of writing a data in RUN status of low speed execution type programs Measurement of low speed scan time Reset of watchdog timers for low speed execution type programs When low speed END processing is finished the first low speed execution type program is executed again 1 The speci...

Страница 139: ...rocessing time can be checked on the screen displayed by selecting Online Monitor Program monitor list in GX Developer Section 6 13 3 2 Accuracy and measurement of low speed scan time The accuracy of each scan time stored into the special register is 0 1ms Even if the watchdog timer reset instruction WDT is executed in a sequence program the measurement of each scan time is continued 3 When interr...

Страница 140: ...DT b Unavailable instruction The COM instruction is not available for low speed execution type programs c Execution timing Low speed execution type programs are executed even during the scan where the initial execution type program has been executed To prevent low speed execution type programs from being executed after the initial execution type program execution provide interlocks with the specia...

Страница 141: ...on type programs register them in the order of execution b Setting of constant scanning low speed program execution time and low speed execution monitoring time Set the time for constant scan and low speed program execution on the PLC RAS setting tab of PLC parameter The constant scanning setting range is 0 5ms to 2000ms Setting unit 0 5ms The low speed program execution time setting range is 1ms ...

Страница 142: ...t separately from the main routine program Multiple subroutine programs and interrupt programs can also be created in a single stand by type program b Program setup change This is applicable when only a necessary program is to be executed among pre created programs corresponding to all systems For example the program preset as a stand by wait in the PLC parameter dialog box can be changed to a sca...

Страница 143: ...broutine and or interrupt programs in a stand by type program and call them using a pointer or when an interrupt occurs 3 a in this section Change a stand by type program to any other execution type using an instruction 3 b in this section a When placing subroutine or interrupt programs in a single stand by type program When creating subroutine or interrupt programs in a single stand by type progr...

Страница 144: ...1 3 2 Use common pointers Section 10 10 2 When local pointers are used the subroutine programs in the stand by type program cannot be executed from another program b When changing execution type by instruction Use the PSCAN PLOWNote3 24 PSTOP and or POFF instruction to change the execution type Note23 Figure 3 40 Operation of subroutine and interrupt programs in stand by type program Note23 P100 R...

Страница 145: ...ition is satisfied the internal relay M0 in Figure 3 41 turns ON DEF is changed into a scan execution type program and ABC into a stand by type program Before execution of PSCAN and PSTOP instructions After execution of PSCAN and PSTOP instructions Scan execution type program ABC PSCAN is the instruction that changes the specified program DEF into a scan execution type PSTOP is the instruction tha...

Страница 146: ...am creation a Unavailable devices Unavailable devices depend on the program type subroutine program interrupt program or the execution type changed by an instruction b Execution of subroutine program using local device Refer to Section 10 14 1 for execution of the subroutine program using a local device 5 Settings for stand by type program execution a Program When setting the created program as a ...

Страница 147: ...interrupt allowable status by the EI instruction 2 Fixed scan execution type program processing Fixed scan execution type program processing is explained below a When there are multiple fixed scan execution type programs Fixed scan execution type programs are executed at the specified time intervals When multiple fixed scan execution type programs reach the specified time at the same time they are...

Страница 148: ...available when the device set as a refresh target is used in the fixed scan execution type program In the fixed scan execution type program do not use the device set as a network refresh target Remark Refer to the following manual for the block guarantee of cyclic data per station CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC ...

Страница 149: ... of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module d Execution during END processing When the constant scan is set and the execution condition for the fixed scan execution type program is established during the wait time in the END processing the fixed scan execution type program is executed Figure 3 46 Fixed scan execution type program execution during waiting time Fixed scan interva...

Страница 150: ...ogram The following processing is performed when the fixed scan execution type program is executed Save and restoration of index register data Save and restoration of file name of file register being used The above processing is not executed when High speed execution of an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is selected in the PLC system of the PLC parameter dialog box The overhead...

Страница 151: ...ruction During execution of a fixed scan execution type program interrupts are disabled DI so that any other interrupt is not enabled Do not execute the EI DI instruction during a fixed scan execution type program execution c Timer T and counter C Timer T and counter C cannot be used in fixed scan execution type programs Timer T cannot perform measurement normally when executing fixed scan executi...

Страница 152: ...ramNote3 27 SD532 SD533 Minimum scan time for low speed execution type programNote3 27 SD534 SD535 Maximum scan time for low speed execution type programNote3 27 SD540 SD541 END processing time SD542 SD543 Constant scan wait time SD544 SD545 Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programNote3 27 SD546 SD547 Execution time low speed execution type programNote3 27 SD548 SD549 Scan ex...

Страница 153: ...grams When the expression 1 is satisfied the actual execution interval of a fixed scan execution type program may increase from the set interval by the time shown in the expression below The following shows an example of the increase in execution time of a fixed scan execution type program With the settings above the expression 1 is 0 5ms 5ms Therefore the execution time of a fixed scan execution ...

Страница 154: ...ram a Program Set the execution type to Fixed scan in the program setting of the PLC parameter dialog box When using multiple fixed scan execution type programs register them in the order of execution After setting the execution type to Fixed scan set the fixed scan interval and unit They can be set within the following ranges When the unit is ms 0 5 to 999 5ms 0 5ms units When the unit is s 1 to ...

Страница 155: ...le name of the program to be executed by the CPU module b Execution type Select the execution type of the file set in Program name 1 Initial execution type Initial This program is executed only once when the PLC is powered ON or is switched from STOP to RUN Section 3 3 1 2 Scan execution type Scan This program is executed once for each scan starting at the scan after execution of the initial execu...

Страница 156: ...e file specified for the file register initial device value device comment and local device on the PLC file setting tab of PLC parameter The default is set to Use PLC file setting Use PLC file setting unchanged When Not used is selected the processing of the file usability setting will be as described in Table3 2 Note29 Figure 3 52 File usability setting Table3 2 Processing when Not used is set in...

Страница 157: ...es the I O of the I O modules and intelligent function modules by block I O refresh Section 3 8 1 When I O refresh setting is performed the I O refresh in the specified range can be made for each set program 1 I O refresh setting application The input X used before execution of a fixed scan execution type program can be imported and the output Y turned ON OFF in the fixed scan execution type progr...

Страница 158: ...4 Each program flow Note31 Universal UD Note3 33 Redundant Note3 33 END processing Initial execution type program Low speed execution type program Scan execution type program Fixed scan execution type program Stand by type program Executed only when constant scan or low speed program execution time has been set Executed at specified time intervals Executed only when execution request is issued Pow...

Страница 159: ...scan execution type Stand by type Remains unchanged from the stand by type No operation Low speed execution type Note3 34 Suspends the execution of the low speed execution type and changes to the scan execution type at the next scan Executed at Step 0 Suspends the execution of the low speed execution type and changes to the stand by type at the next or later scan Suspends the execution of the low ...

Страница 160: ...e where the execution types of the stand by type programs ABC DEF GHI JKL are changed in the control program 4 Changing execution type from the program list monitor The execution type can be changed from the program list monitor of GX Developer For details refer to Section 6 13 1 3 Figure 3 56 Example of instruction triggered execution type changing PSCAN ABC M0 ABC DEF GHI JKL PSTOP ABC M1 PSCAN ...

Страница 161: ...e above operation since the previous information may not be inherited depending on the program changes 2 Boot from a memory card is inexecutable since the memory card cannot be used in the Basic model QCPU 3 Multiple CPU system parameter consistency check is not performed for the Redundant CPU since it cannot configure the multiple CPU system 4 When the start mode is the hot start mode in the Redu...

Страница 162: ...function module to the CPU module and are output from the CPU module to the output module or intelligent function module 1 I O refresh timing The I O refresh is executed before the sequence program operation starts When the constant scan is set the I O refresh is performed after the constant scan waiting time has elapsed The I O refresh is executed at each constant scan cycle 3 4 3 Automatic refre...

Страница 163: ...3 Note33 Table3 5 END processing list END processing item CPU modules performing END processing Reference Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU CC Link IE controller network refresh processing MELSECNET H or CC Link refresh processing Automatic refresh processing of intelligent function module Section 8 1 1 Self diagnostic processing Section 6 ...

Страница 164: ...sing time taken from switching STOP to RUN until the operation start of the sequence program varies with the system configuration and parameter settings Normally 1 to 3 seconds Note that it may increase depending on the conditions 2 STOP Status Operation Processing STOP status is a status where the sequence program operations are stopped by the RUN STOP switch the RUN STOP RESET switch in the case...

Страница 165: ...rsal model QCPU only Even if the CPU module is in STOP or PAUSE status the following operations can be executed I O monitor or test operation using GX Developer Read write from to the external device using the MC protocol Communication with other stations using CC Link IE controller network and MELSECNET H Communication with CC Link remote stations Table3 6 Operation processing by switch operation...

Страница 166: ...ocessing The timer clock continues a When resume start is specified for the SFC program When a resume start is specified for the SFC program the system is saved b When recovered from momentary power failure When a momentary power failure ends the operation processing is resumed c Watchdog timer WDT measurement during momentary power failure Even if the operation is interrupted due to momentary pow...

Страница 167: ...ocessing as that after the following operation occurs Power ON Resetting using RESET L CLR switch RUN STOP RESET switch in the case of the Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU Remote setting using GX Developer POINT 1 In the redundant power supply system operation is not suspended if a momentary power failure occurs in either of the power supply modules while it is suspended if a momentary po...

Страница 168: ...y the following methods 1 Program memory data Clear the data in either of the following methods Check the box and set Clear program memory on the Boot file setting tab of PLC parameter Note3 37Note35 Clear the program memory on the screen displayed by selecting Online Delete PLC data in GX Developer 2 Standard ROM data Automatically cleared when data are written to the standard ROM 3 Memory card d...

Страница 169: ...ar operation by the RESET L CLR switchNote3 38 Note37 Clear operation by the remote latch clear Section 6 6 4 from GX Developer c Clearing device data set to latch clear operation disable The device data set to latch clear operation disable can be cleared only by the instruction or the clear operation using GX Developer 1 Clearing by instruction Reset the device data using the RST instruction or t...

Страница 170: ...ifferences between refresh mode and direct access mode Since the direct access mode makes direct access to an I O module at execution of an instruction it imports input data faster than the refresh mode However its instruction processing time is longer than that of the refresh mode The direct access mode is available for the I O used with the I O modules and intelligent function modules mounted on...

Страница 171: ...ule 3 8 1 Refresh mode 1 Definition of refresh mode The refresh mode batch accesses I O modules before start of sequence program operation 2 Input The ON OFF information of the input module is batch imported to the area for communication with the input module inside the CPU module before start of sequence program operation When a sequence program is executed the ON OFF data of the input X device m...

Страница 172: ...h area is performed during END processing Input refresh Before start of the sequence program operation input data are batch read from the input module 1 and ORed with the GX Developer input area or remote input refresh area data and the results are stored into the input X device memory Output refresh Data in the output Y device memory is output in a batch 2 to the output module before sequence pro...

Страница 173: ...onse lag An output change lags a maximum of two scans behind an input module change depending on the ON timing of an external contact Ladder examples Figure 3 60 When Y5E turns ON fastest Figure 3 61 When Y5E turns ON slowest 55 X5 Y5E Ladder that turns the Y5E output ON when an X5 input turns ON Delay time Minimum 1 scan OFF ON 0 END END 0 0 Input refresh 56 External contact OFF ON X5 OFF ON Y5E ...

Страница 174: ...accesses an I O module when each instruction is executed in a sequence program The CPU module uses the direct access input DX and direct access output DY to perform the direct mode I O processing Figure 3 62 Direct mode Input module CPU module Device memory 0 DX10 ON OFF data ON OFF data Input of ON OFF data at instruction execution Output of ON OFF data at instruction execution ...

Страница 175: ...etting is made to the input X with CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H and CC Link Automatic refresh of the remote input refresh area is performed during END processing When an input contact instruction has been executed The input module s input information 1 is ORed with GX Developer input area s input information 2 or remote input refresh area data and the result is stored into the input X...

Страница 176: ...ternal contact Ladder examples Figure 3 64 When DY5E turns ON fastest Figure 3 65 When DY5E turns ON slowest 55 DX5 DY5E Ladder that turns the DY5E output ON when an DX5 input turns ON Delay time OFF ON 0 55 56 External contact OFF ON OFF ON DX5 External contact DY5E External load CPU module devices OFF ON 0 55 56 External contact OFF ON OFF ON DX5 External contact DY5E External load CPU module de...

Страница 177: ...l HEX expression form in which BIN data are expressed in 4 bit units and the BCD binary coded decimal expression form are applicable to the CPU module Real numbers may also be used Section 3 9 4 Table3 8 shows the numeric expressions of BIN HEX BCD and DEC decimal Table3 8 BIN HEX BCD and Decimal Numeric Expressions DEC Decimal HEX Hexadecimal BIN Binary BCD Binary Coded Decimal 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 ...

Страница 178: ...es the set value as a BIN and performs operation Hence operation is performed using the value different from the set value b below b How to enter numeric value without taking into account BIN notation Use the BIN instruction to convert the data set in BCD into BIN used in the CPU module Using the BIN instruction allows users to set numeric value data from the outside without taking into account BI...

Страница 179: ... CPU module a How to output numeric value The CPU module performs operation in BIN If binary values used in the CPU module are output as they are to a digital display they will not displayed correctly Therefore the BCD instruction is used to convert the data operated in BIN into BCD used by the external display or similar device Using the BCD instruction allows the same display as in DEC decimal t...

Страница 180: ... used in CPU module Each CPU module register data registers link registers etc consists of 16 bits b Numeric data available for CPU module Each CPU module register can store numeric values of 32768 to 32767 The following shows the numeric notation for CPU module registers Table3 9 Comparison between Binary and Decimal Notations DEC Decimal BIN Binary 0 0000 1 0001 2 0010 3 0011 4 0100 5 0101 6 011...

Страница 181: ...t 5 Memories and Files Handled by CPU Module 6 Functions 7 Communication using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module POINT To each bit of each register a 2n value is assigned Note that an unsigned no sign binary number 0 to 65535 cannot be used since the most significant bit is used for discrimination of sign positive or negative 1 When most signifi...

Страница 182: ...sents 0 to 15 in 1 digit letters AH to FH are used to represent the numbers 10 to 15 Then a carry occurs after FH Table3 10 shows the numeric expressions of BIN HEX and DEC decimal 2 Hexadecimal numeric expression CPU module registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits For 16 bits 0 to FFFFH can be specified in hexadecimal Table3 10 Comparison of BIN HEX and DEC Numeric Expressio...

Страница 183: ...is a numbering system in which one digit of DEC decimal is expressed in BIN binary Though it uses 4 bit representation like hexadecimal notation it dose not use letters AH to FH Table3 11 shows the numeric expressions of BIN BCD and DEC 2 BCD numeric expression CPU module registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits Therefore the numeric values expressed in BCD notation can be st...

Страница 184: ...l number data is expressed as shown below using 2 word devices Sign 1 Mantissa 2 exponent part The bit configuration of internal expression for the real number data is as follows 1 Sign The sign is expressed at b31 as follows 0 Positive 1 Negative 2 Exponent part The n of 2n is expressed by b23 to b30 depending on the BIN value in b23 to b30 3 Mantissa For a binary number 1 XXXXXX the XXXXXX porti...

Страница 185: ...onent part3 to 82H to 1000 0010 2 Mantissa 010 00000 00000 00000 00000 2 Therefore the data expression will be 41200000H as shown below 2 Storing 0 75 0 75 10 0 11 2 1 100 2 1 2 SignPositive to 0 Exponent part 1 to 7EH to 0111 1110 2 Mantissa 100 00000 00000 00000 00000 2 Therefore the data expression will be 3F400000H as shown below POINT In binary notation the portion of the value following the ...

Страница 186: ...alog box Default Perform internal operation processing with double precision 2 Operation result The operation result is single precision regardless of the floating point operation processing setting In the internal operation processing with double precision internal operation only is performed with double precision 64 bits Note38 Figure 3 71 PLC system screen Basic Note3 39 Process Redundant Unive...

Страница 187: ...h double precision This option is used when accuracy is required to ensure compatibility with the conventional models When using an instruction such as SIN or COS with which many real number operations are performed internally accuracy is increased by performing internal operation processing with double precision When internal operation processing is not performed with double precision This option...

Страница 188: ... n of 2n is expressed by b52 to b62 depending on the BIN value in b52 to b62 3 Mantissa For a binary number 1 XXXXXX the XXXXXX portion is expressed by 52 bits b0 to b51 Note39 Figure 3 72 Bit configuration of real number data Figure 3 73 Relation between value stored in exponent part and exponent Note39 High Performance Process Redundant Basic Note3 40 Note3 40 Note3 40 Note3 40 b63 b62 to b52 b5...

Страница 189: ...000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2 Therefore the data expression will be 4014000000000000H as shown below 2 Storing 0 75 0 75 10 0 11 2 1 100 2 1 2 SignPositive to 0 Exponent part 1 to 3FDH to 011 1111 1101 2 Mantissa 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2 Therefore the data expression will be 3FD8000000000000H as shown below POINT In binary notation the port...

Страница 190: ...U character strings can be used only in the MOV STR DSTR VAL DVAL ESTR and EVAL instructions Basic Note3 41 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Low 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 1 1 3 0 1 0 0 4 0 1 0 1 5 1 0 1 1 0 6 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 7 1 0 0 0 8 1 1 0 0 1 9 1 0 1 0 A 1 0 1 1 B 0 1 1 1 0 E F D C NUL SP Comma Minus Period z Under line _ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F...

Страница 191: ...main base unit 2 The high speed access function between Multiple CPUs cannot be used 2 Number of available slots The number of available slots modules includes empty slots If Slot 2 is set to Empty 0 point as shown in Figure 4 1 it occupies one slot The number of available slots modules varies depending on each main base unit QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection For the co...

Страница 192: ...dundant CPU whose serial number first five digits is 09011 or earlier the extension base unit cannot be connected to the main base unit Appendix 4 4 Therefore the number of available slots will be 11 Table4 2 Number of extension stages extension base units and numbers of slots CPU module Extension base unit Number of extension stages Slim type main base unit 1 Number of available slots 2 Number of...

Страница 193: ... error SP UNIT LAY ERR will occur if any module is mounted after the slot exceeding the number of available slots Figure 4 3 Configuration example for High Performance model QCPU Power supply module CPU module Extension 1 Main base unit Slot number CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Extension 2 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Extension 3 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 4...

Страница 194: ...nit Table4 3 Available extension base units CPU module Available extension base unit Q00JCPU Q5 B Q6 B Q6 RB Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q5 B Q6 B Q6 RB QA1S6 B QA65B QA6ADP A5 B A6 B Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q5 B Q6 B Q6 RB Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU Q6 WRB fixed to first extension stage Q6 RB fixed to second extension stage or later stages Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU ...

Страница 195: ...base units for extension set the extension stage numbers with the stage number setting connectors on the extension base units Set the extension stage numbers in order of connection starting from the extension base unit connected to the main base unit Figure 4 4 Extension stage number setting and setting order Power supply module CPU module Extension 1 Main base unit Slot number CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7...

Страница 196: ...s skipped in the auto mode Section 4 4 1 of base unit assignment 0 slot is set to the skipped stage and the number of empty slots does not increase Figure 4 5 Number of slots when extension stage number is skipped Power supply module CPU module Extension 1 Main base unit Slot number CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Extension 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Extension 3 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2...

Страница 197: ...ilt in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module b When the same extension stage number is set The same extension stage number cannot be set to multiple extension base units Figure 4 6 When the same extension stage number is set Power supply module CPU module Extension 1 Main base unit Slot number CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Extension 1 Extension base unit Q31...

Страница 198: ... pins inserted in two or more positions Also they cannot be used without connector pins being inserted Figure 4 7 When connector pins are inserted into two or more positions or no connector pin is inserted Power supply module CPU module Extension 1 Main base unit Slot number CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Extension 2 Extension base unit Q312B Q68B Q68B Connector pin must be inserted Connector pins ...

Страница 199: ...g the QA6 B Note1 Figure 4 8 Layout for use of AnS A series compatible extension base units Basic Process Redundant Note4 1 Universal UD Note4 1 Note4 1 Note4 1 The Basic model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU cannot use the AnS A series compatible extension base unit QA1S6 B QA6 B and QA6ADP A5 B A6 B Basic Process Redundant Universal UD Note4 1 Note4 1 Note4 1 Note4 1 CPU ...

Страница 200: ...main and extension base units according to the number of slots than can be occupied The I O numbers are assigned according to the modules which can be mounted to the current base unit Because 8 slot setting is fixed to the AnS A series main base unit or extension base unit a 3 slot or 5 slot base unit occupies 8 slots Since the Q series CPU module occupies only the mountable slots of the base unit...

Страница 201: ...andled by CPU Module 6 Functions 7 Communication using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module a For 3 slot base unit 3 slots are occupied Figure 4 9 For 3 slot base units 3 4 5 6 7 8 Power supply module CPU module 5 slots are not occupied Main base unit Slot number CPU 0 1 2 Extension base unit Q33B Q63B Q63B 5 slots are not occupied 5 slots are not ...

Страница 202: ... Figure 4 10 For 5 slot base units Figure 4 11 For 8 slot base units Power supply module CPU module Main base unit Slot number CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Extension base unit Q35B Q65B 3 slots are not occupied 3 slots are not occupied Power supply module CPU module Main base unit Slot number CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Extension base unit Q38B Q68B ...

Страница 203: ...ies and Files Handled by CPU Module 6 Functions 7 Communication using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module d For 12 slot base unit 12 slots are occupied Figure 4 12 For 12 slot base units Power supply module CPU module Main base unit Slot number CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Extension base unit Q312B Q612B 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ...

Страница 204: ...e number of slots for all used base units If the number of slot is not set for all the base units I O assignment may not work correctly The followings result if the preset number of slots differs from that of the installed base units 1 When the preset number of slots is greater than the number of actually used slots The preset number of slots is occupied The slots of numbers after the used ones ar...

Страница 205: ...slots on the right of the base unit are disabled If a module is mounted to the prohibited slot an error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs POINT One Redundant CPU occupies 2 slots Hence the number of mountable modules is the preset number of slots 1 For example when a 5 slot main base unit is used the number of mountable slots is 4 Figure 4 14 When the preset number of slots is less than the number of actuall...

Страница 206: ...r s memo or for parameter printing c Extension cable Set the used extension cable model name within 16 characters CPU module does not use the designated model name It is used as a user s memo or for parameter printing d Slots Used with CPU module Select the number of points for the slot of the base unit being used from the followings 2 2slots 3 3slots 5 5slots 8 8slots 10 10slots 12 12slots e 8slo...

Страница 207: ... OFF data to the CPU module and output Y is used to output ON OFF data from the CPU module 2 I O number expressions I O numbers are expressed as hexadecimal When using 16 point I O modules I O numbers are consecutively assigned to the slots having 0 to F 16 points as shown in Figure 4 16 The module mounted in the base unit assigns the following For the input module X is assigned at the beginning o...

Страница 208: ...base unit The slot numbers of the 2nd stage s extension base unit continue from the last slot number of the 1st stage s extension base unit X 0 to F Y 0 to F Inupt module Output module Intelligent function module Allocate the I O number with the I O points of each slot Empty slot points designated at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box are allocated Default 16 points Slot num...

Страница 209: ... assigned to a 5 slot base unit and 12 slots are assigned to a 12 slot base unit b In Detail mode The number of slots set in the I O assignment setting of the PLC parameter dialog box is used 2 Order of I O number assignment The I O numbers are assigned to the modules from left to right consecutively starting from 0H assigned to the module on the right of the CPU module in the main base unit Note4...

Страница 210: ...ight of CPU module X0 to X1F are assigned as I O numbers 5 I O numbers of empty slots If the base unit has empty slots mounted with no I O modules or no intelligent function modules special function modules are mounted the points designated at the I O assigment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box are assigned to the empty slots Default value is 16 points POINT When the assignment of base un...

Страница 211: ...le at remote stations When using the input X and output Y of the CPU module for the I O numbers of remote stations assign the I O numbers later than those used by the CPU module side I O modules and intelligent function modules Example When X Y0 to X Y3FF 1024 points are used by the CPU module side I O modules and intelligent function modules X Y400 and later can be used at the remote stations Not...

Страница 212: ...ter setting has not been made in the CC Link system the following points are assigned to the CC Link master local modules of lower numbers Basic model QCPU X Y400 to 7FF 1024 points High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU X Y1000 to 17FF 2048 points 2 There is restriction on the order of allocating I O numbers for MELSECNET H remote I O networks CC Link or other ...

Страница 213: ... I O module other than 16 point module or intelligent function module special function module is removed due to a malfunction 3 Changing the I O numbers to those used in the program When the designed program s I O numbers are different from the actual system I O numbers each module s I O number of base units can be set to program I O number 4 Setting the input response time I O response time The i...

Страница 214: ... is reset 2 The I O assignment setting is necessary for changing the response time of the input modules and the switch of intelligent function modules 3 If any of the I O modules other than the 16 point modules fails without I O assignment setting being made using GX Developer the I O numbers after that module may change leading to a malfunction Therefore it is recommended to make I O assignment s...

Страница 215: ...ints and Start XY starting I O number can be set for each slot of the base units For example to change the number of occupied I O points of the designated slot only the number of occupied I O points can be designated The items other than designated are set to the status where the base unit is installed 1 I O assignment The I O assignment is conducted at the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Par...

Страница 216: ... CPU module It is used as a user s memo d Points Used with CPU module To change the number of occupied I O points of each slot select it from the followings 0 0 point 16 16 points 32 32 points 48 48 points 64 64 points 128 128 points 256 256 points 512 512 points 1 1024 1024 points 1 If the number of occupied I O points is not designated for a slot the one of the actually mounted module is used 1 ...

Страница 217: ...ts is less than the number of mounted intelligent function module points An error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs 3 When the preset number of points is greater than the number of I O points of modules actually mounted The points in excess of the mounted module points are not used by the I O module 4 Mounted module and I O assigned module type The mounted module type and the set type in the I O assignment s...

Страница 218: ...e extension base unit pay attention to the following points Mount the Q5 B Q6 B QA1S6 B QA6 B and QA6ADP A5 B A6 B in order from the nearest position of the main base unit Assign the I O number of a module mounted on the base unit putting each series in block and in order of Q series A series or A series Q series An error SP UNIT LAY ERR will occur when the I O number of the module is not assigned...

Страница 219: ...case of 1 or 2 below therefore the start XY setting of each slot may overlap the one assigned by the CPU module 1 Settings of I O numbers were exchanged in the start XY 2 There are slots with start XY setting and those without start XY setting automatically assigned slot The following example Figure 4 22 shows overlapping start XY Be extremely careful not to overlap the start XY of each slot Overl...

Страница 220: ...ment before the I O assignment with GX Developer Figure 4 24 I O number assignment Before changing points for empty slot Q38B Q68B Input module Input module Input module Empty Output module Output module Output module Output module 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 16 points 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 3 X00 X20 X40 Y70 Y90 YB0 YD0 Number of I O points Slot number I O number ...

Страница 221: ...numbers after I O assignment After changing points of empty slot Select 32 points When the type is not selected the type of the installed module will be selected Q38B Q68B Input module Input module Input module Empty Output module Output module Output module Output module 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 3 X00 X20 X40 Y80 YA0 YC0 YE0 Num...

Страница 222: ...mbers Extension 1 Q38B Q68B Input module Input module Input module Empty Output module Output module Output module Output module 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 16 points 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 3 X00 X20 X40 Y70 Y90 YB0 YD0 Number of I O points Slot number I O number 60 X1F X3F X5F Y8F YAF YCF YEF 6F Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Intelligent f...

Страница 223: ... After changing slot I O numbers 200 is designated as the head I O number 70 is designated as the head I O number When the head I O number is not designated the I O number following the 3rd slot will be assigned Extension 1 Q38B Q68B Input module Input module Input module Input module Output module Output module Output module Output module 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 32 point...

Страница 224: ...34 4 9 Checking the I O Numbers 4 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT 4 9 Checking the I O Numbers System monitor of GX Developer allows the check of the mounted modules of CPU module and their I O numbers Section 6 20 ...

Страница 225: ...the data can be stored in those memories 1 Memory configuration 1 The Q00JCPU does not have the standard RAM File registers are unavailable a Program memory Section 5 1 2 A memory for storing programs required for operations in the Basic model QCPU b Standard ROM Section 5 1 3 A memory for performing the boot operation in the Basic model QCPU c Standard RAM Section 5 1 4 A memory for file register...

Страница 226: ...ecessity of each memory 1 Before use be sure to format the memory using GX Developer 2 Make sure to format the standard RAM by GX Developer before using Q00CPU or Q01CPU of the function version A Q00CPU and Q01CPU of the function version B don t need to be formatted Formatting the standard RAM using GX Developer to Q00CPU or Q01CPU of the function B an error code 4150H will be displayed on the GX ...

Страница 227: ...e programs stored in the standard ROM are booted read to the program memory to perform operations 2 Storable data The program memory can store parameters intelligent function module parameters programs device comments device initial values and user setting system area data Section 5 1 1 2 POINT If the total volume of the data to be stored into the program memory exceeds its capacity examine reduci...

Страница 228: ...ry capacity can be checked from the Read from PLC screen of GX Developer 3 c in this section Table5 3 User setting system area type System area type Description High speed monitor area from other station Setting this area speeds up monitoring from GX Developer connected to a module such as a serial communication module When monitor is to be executed simultaneously from multiple locations this area...

Страница 229: ... of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module c Checking the memory capacity after formatting To check the memory capacity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer 1 Select Program memory Device memory as the target memory on the Read from PLC screen 2 Click the button 3 The memory capacity appears in the Total free space volume field Figure 5 3 Memory capacity checking proced...

Страница 230: ...o the program memory choose Online Write to PLC on GX Developer Select Program memory Device memory as the target memory on the Write to PLC screen and write data to the PLC POINT The file size has the minimum unit Section 5 4 4 The occupied memory capacity may be greater than the actual file size Figure 5 4 Write to PLC screen ...

Страница 231: ...el QCPU The programs stored in the standard ROM are booted read to the program memory Section 5 1 2 to perform operations 2 Storable data The standard ROM can store parameters intelligent function module parameters programs device comments and device initial value data Section 5 1 1 2 3 Checking the memory capacity To check the memory capacity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer 1 Select S...

Страница 232: ... the program memory to ROM on GX Developer Section 5 1 5 POINT The file size has the minimum unit Section 5 4 4 The occupied memory capacity may be greater than the actual file size 5 How to use the program stored in the standard ROM Since operation cannot be executed by the program stored in the standard ROM use that program by booting reading it to the program memory Section 5 1 5 ...

Страница 233: ...nly File registers in the standard RAM allow fast access like data registers 2 Storable data The standard RAM can store one file of file register Section 5 1 1 2 3 Before using the standard RAM Make sure to format the standard RAM by GX Developer before using Q00CPU or Q01CPU of the function version A Q00CPU and Q01CPU of the function version B do not need to be formatted Formatting the standard R...

Страница 234: ...acity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer 1 Select Standard RAM as the target memory on the Read from PLC screen 2 Click the button 3 The memory capacity appears in the Total free space volume field Figure 5 7 Memory capacity checking procedure Free space volume 1 Select target memory 2 Click Free space volume button 3 Memory capacity is displayed ...

Страница 235: ...s 7 Communication using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module 4 Write to standard RAM To write data to the standard RAM choose Online Write to PLC on GX Developer Select Standard RAM as the target memory on the Write to PLC screen and write data to the PLC POINT The file size has the minimum unit Section 5 4 4 The occupied memory capacity may be gre...

Страница 236: ...tored in the program memory It does not operate the program stored in the standard ROM The program stored in the standard ROM is booted read to the program memory to perform operation b Procedure for boot run The following provides the procedure for boot run 1 Program creation by GX Developer Create a program for executing boot run 2 Boot file by GX Developer Set Do boot from Standard ROM in the B...

Страница 237: ...Developer to stop boot run and execute operation by the parameter program written to the program memory 1 Format the program memory 2 Choose Online Write to PLC Flash ROM Write the program memory to ROM Parameters and sequence program data in the standard ROM are cleared 3 Write parameters and sequence program data to the program memory d Precautions for standard ROM program execution 1 Files stor...

Страница 238: ...iting files to the standard ROM choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer and save the stored files using GX Developer in advance 2 Preparation of files to be written Since all files stored in the standard ROM are automatically deleted when files are to be written to the standard ROM prepare all files to be stored in advance b Write procedure The procedure to write files to the standard ROM will...

Страница 239: ...ite to PLC Flash ROM Write the program memory to ROM and copy these files to the program memory 4 Precautions a Setting the communication time check period Check at communication time in GX Developer When files are written to the standard ROM the communication is checked for 180 seconds if the communication time check period Check at communication time is set to 180 seconds or less in GX Developer...

Страница 240: ...story in the memory card 2 Can be stored only when the Universal model QCPU is used Figure 5 13 Memory configuration of the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU or Universal model QCPU CPU module Memory card Parameter Program Device initial value Device comments Program memory Parameter Program Device initial value Device comments Local devices Standard ROM Standard RAM CPU shared...

Страница 241: ...to perform operations Section 5 2 9 b Standard ROM Section 5 2 4 A memory for storing data such as parameters and programs This memory can be specified as a storage drive of the boot source programs in the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU and Redundant CPU Note5 1 c Standard RAM Section 5 2 5 A memory for using file registers local devices and sampling trace files without installing a memor...

Страница 242: ...e on a memory card SP FWRITE allows the batch write to a specified file on a memory card 8 Set the area used by the system Section 5 2 2 3 b 9 Drive No is used to specify the target memory to be written read to from the external device using a sequence program or MC protocol Since the target memory name is specified on GX Developer it is not necessary to take into account the drive No 10 When the ...

Страница 243: ...essary Standard RAM 64k bytes 128k bytes 256k bytes 1 Memory card SRAM card Q2MEM 1MBS 1M bytes Q2MEM 2MBS 2M bytes Necessary Executed by GX Developer Flash card Q2MEM 2MBF 2M bytes Q2MEM 4MBF 4M bytes Unnecessary ATA card Q2MEM 8MBA 8M bytes Q2MEM 16MBA 16M bytes Q2MEM 32MBA 32M bytes Necessary Executed by GX Developer Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU Formatting Program mem...

Страница 244: ...nction module parameters programs device comments device initial values and user setting system area data Section 5 2 1 2 POINT The capacity of the program memory is the same as the program capacity of each module Section 5 2 1 3 If the total volume of the data to be stored into the program memory exceeds its capacity examine the following 1 Reduce the user setting system area 2 Transfer the data ...

Страница 245: ...a is created the available area decreases by the number of created area steps The memory capacity can be checked from the Read from PLC screen of GX Developer 3 c in this section Table5 6 User setting system area type System area type Description High speed monitor area from other station Setting this area speeds up monitoring from GX Developer connected to a module such as a serial communication ...

Страница 246: ...o check the memory capacity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer 1 Select Program memory Device memory as the target memory on the Read from PLC screen 2 Click the button 3 The memory capacity appears in the Total free space volume field Figure 5 15 Memory capacity checking procedure Free space volume 1 Select target memory 2 Click Free space volume button 3 Memory capacity is displayed ...

Страница 247: ...ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module 4 Write to program memory To write data to the program memory choose Online Write to PLC on GX Developer Select Program memory Device memory as the target memory on the Write to PLC screen and write data to the PLC POINT The file size has the minimum unit Section 5 4 4 The occupied memory capacity may be greater than the actual f...

Страница 248: ...on of the CPU module is performed Figure 5 17 shows the flow of program operations Note3 Figure 5 17 Flow of program operations Note3 High Performance Process Redundant Note5 3 Note5 3 Note5 3 Drive3 Standard RAM SRAM Power ON RESET Initial processing Transfers contents of the program memory to the program cache memory I O module refresh processing Program operation processing END processing Drive...

Страница 249: ...g batch transfer of data to the program memory when the CPU module in the RUN status Ts Scan time s 4 Checking the transfer status of data to a program memory Transfer status to the program memory can be checked either on the Program memory transfer status screen of GX Developer or in the special relay special register a Checking on the Program memory transfer status screen Figure 5 19 shows the P...

Страница 250: ... MODULE 5 Checking the transfer status of data to a program memoryNote5 4 Note4 Transfer status from the program cache memory to the program memory can be checked by the special relay SM165 Note4 Universal UD Note5 4 When checking the transfer status to the program memory with a Universal model QCPU check the version of the CPU module Appendix 4 5 Note5 4 Universal UD ...

Страница 251: ... Definition of standard ROM The standard ROM is a memory for storing data such as parameters and programs This memory can be specified as a storage drive of the boot source programs in the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU and Redundant CPU Note5 5 The standard ROM can save parameters and programs without battery backup 2 Storable data The standard ROM can store parameters intelligent functi...

Страница 252: ...check the memory capacity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer 1 Select Standard ROM as the target memory on the Read from PLC screen 2 Click the button 3 The memory capacity appears in the Total free space volume field Figure 5 20 Memory capacity checking procedure Free space volume 1 Select target memory 2 Click Free space volume button 3 Memory capacity is displayed ...

Страница 253: ...ard ROM Section 5 2 7 Use the automatic write of all data from memory card to standard ROM Section 5 2 8 b Universal model QCPU Choose Online Write to PLC on GX Developer and select Standard ROM as the target memory to write the program memory data Section 5 2 2 Select Standard ROM as the target memory to write the program memory data POINT The file size has the minimum unit Section 5 4 4 The occu...

Страница 254: ...ction 5 2 1 2 POINT 1 If the volume of the files to be stored into the standard RAM exceeds the standard RAM capacity examine the following Store the file into a memory card Examine to reduce points of the file register local device and sampling trace However note that in the case of 1 above access speed will be lower than that of the standard RAM 2 If the sampling trace file is stored into the st...

Страница 255: ...cation using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module b Checking the memory capacity after formatting To check the memory capacity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer 1 Select Standard RAM as the target memory on the Read from PLC screen 2 Click the button 3 The memory capacity appears in the Total free space volume field Figure 5 22 Memory cap...

Страница 256: ... Online Write to PLC on GX Developer Select Standard RAM as the target memory on the Write to PLC screen and write data to the PLC POINT The file size has the minimum unit Section 5 4 4 The occupied memory capacity may be greater than the actual file size Note that as the number of files rises the difference between the occupied memory capacity and actual file size increases Figure 5 23 Write to P...

Страница 257: ... trace function Section 6 14 When saving 17 or more error history dataNote5 7 Section 6 18 When using the SRAM card as a file register data can be written read to from a sequence program up to the following points High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Up to 1017k points Universal model QCPU Up to 4086k points b Flash card Data can be read by a sequence program only Write data by GX...

Страница 258: ...The Universal model QCPU cannot store the error history in the memory card Section 6 18 Refer to Section 5 2 1 2 for the list of data that can be stored into each memory Table5 8 Data that can be stored into memory cards Data name Memory card RAM Memory cards ROM SRAM card Flash card ATA card Parameter Intelligent function module parameter Program Device comment Device initial value File register ...

Страница 259: ...Formatting To format the program memory choose Online Format PLC memory on GX Developer When formatting the SRAM card select Memory card RAM as the target memory When formatting the ATA card select Memory card ROM as the target memory POINT 1 Use only GX Developer to format the ATA card If formatted by the formatting function of Microsoft Windows the card may not be used with the CPU module 2 When...

Страница 260: ...ck the memory capacity choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer 1 Select Memory card RAM or Memory card ROM as the target memory on the Read from PLC screen 2 Click the button 3 The memory capacity appears in the Total free space volume field Figure 5 25 Memory capacity checking procedure Free space volume 1 Select target memory 3 Memory capacity is displayed 2 Click Free space volume button ...

Страница 261: ...emory on the Write to PLC screen When writing data to the ATA card select Memory card ROM as the target memory on the Write to PLC screen b Write to Flash card To write data to the Flash card there are the following two methods Choose Online Write to PLC Flash ROM Write the program memory to ROM on GX Developer to batch write the program memory data to the Flash card Section 5 2 7 Choose Online Wr...

Страница 262: ...undant CPU Universal Model QCPU 5 2 6 Memory card 5 MEMORIES AND FILES USED IN CPU MODULE 5 How to use the program stored in the memory card The programs stored in the memory card are booted read to the program memory to perform operations Section 5 2 9 ...

Страница 263: ...o ROM is used in the following cases When performing debugging in the program memory program copying the debugged data to the standard ROM or Flash card and executing boot run Section 5 2 9 When saving the program memory data into the standard ROM or Flash card without battery backup b Method using Write to PLC Flash ROM of GX DeveloperNote8 The files specified in GX Developer are batch written to...

Страница 264: ...be written to the standard ROM or Flash card prepare all files to be stored in advance 3 When executing boot run When storing the parameters into the standard ROM or Flash card before boot run make the boot file setting described in Section 5 2 9 b Write procedure How to write files to the standard ROM or Flash card is explained here 1 Using Copy program memory data into ROM of GX Developer Choose...

Страница 265: ...les Since all files stored in the standard ROM or Flash card are automatically deleted when files are to be written to the standard ROM or Flash card additions changes to the stored files cannot be made directly Use the following procedures a When Write the program memory to ROM of GX Developer was used for writing Choose Online Read from PLC on GX Developer and read all files of the program memor...

Страница 266: ... short GX Developer may time out b Writing files from GX Developer on another station via CC Link Since long processing time is required for writing files to the standard ROM or Flash card set the CPU monitoring time setting SW000A of CC Link to 60 seconds or more The default value of 90 seconds can be used Remark Refer to the following manual for details on the communication time check period Che...

Страница 267: ...e transmission speed or use USB Long communication time will be also required for the write to PLC Flash ROM from the other station d Online change enabled for write to PLC Flash ROM only Write to PLC Flash ROM can be executed online In either of the following cases however execute the write to PLC Flash ROM after setting the PLC to the STOP status 1 The file registers on the Flash card are used i...

Страница 268: ...ndard ROM Using the automatic write to standard ROM the parameters and programs written to the memory card in advance can be written to the standard ROM without use of GX Developer personal computer This function is convenient for the following cases When writing the same parameters and programs to multiple CPU modules When creating the same environment at a remote site Note9 Figure 5 32 Automatic...

Страница 269: ... write to standard ROM 1 In the boot file setting of the PLC parameter dialog box check Clear the program memory and Auto Download all data from memory card to standard ROM In the boot file setting set the parameters programs etc to be booted Set the transfer from to Standard ROM 2 Store the set parameters and programs to be booted into the memory card Section 5 2 6 4 b Operation on High Performan...

Страница 270: ...ram memory contents to the standard ROM 5 Upon completion of the automatic write to standard ROM the BOOT LED and ERR LED flicker and the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU or Redundant CPU is placed in a stop error status 6 Power OFF the PLC 7 Remove the memory card and set the DIP switches for valid drive of the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU or Redundant CPU to the standard ROM se...

Страница 271: ... file whose name is the same as that of the file to be booted from the memory card the file is added to the program memory If the program memory capacity is exceeded at this time FILE ERROR error code 2401 will occur b Program memory clear at boot When files are to be booted from the memory card to the program memory whether boot will be executed after program memory clear or without program memor...

Страница 272: ... operates the programs stored in the program memory It does not operate the programs stored in the standard ROM or memory card To do this make setting to boot read the programs in the standard ROM or memory card to the program memory at power on or reset 3 4 below The programs having the file names specified in the boot file setting are booted from the standard ROM or memory card to the program me...

Страница 273: ...and transfer destination The file can be booted its transfer source or transfer destination depends on the CPU module The following table shows the executable combination for boot run a High performance model QCPU Process CPU and Redundant CPU Boot available Boot not available b Universal model QCPU Boot available Boot not available Table5 9 Available files for boot run File name Transfer source T...

Страница 274: ...ry card set the names of files to be booted read to the program memory in the boot file of the PLC parameter dialog box c Hardware setting for boot run Set the parameter valid drive DIP switches to indicate the memory that will store the parameters Note5 12 Note10 When executing boot run set the parameter storage location to the standard ROM or memory card 5 a in this section Figure 5 37 Boot file...

Страница 275: ...ers and programs by GX Developer 1 High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Write the parameters to the memory set by the parameter valid drive DIP switches Also write the files set in the boot file setting in b to the transfer source memory 2 Universal model QCPU Write the files set in the boot file settings and parameters to a memory card f Program execution Reset the CPU module usi...

Страница 276: ... Developer a High Performance model QCPU Process CPU or Redundant CPU 1 Write the parameters which are not set as a boot file to the program memory 2 Set the parameter valid drive DIP switches of the CPU module to the program memory SW2 OFF SW3 OFF 3 Power on the PLC again or reset the CPU module b Universal model QCPU 1 Remove the memory card and write the parameters for which boot file is not se...

Страница 277: ... deletion from program memory and program transfer from memory card to program memory Refer to the following manual for details of the PLOADP instruction PUNLOADP instruction and PSWAPP instruction QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions b Program setting made when program file is changed Even if a program file has been changed during RUN of the High Performance model QCPU Proces...

Страница 278: ...ameters PLC parameters specified in the boot file setting to the memory card The CPU module ignores the boot file settings of PLC parameter if the parameters are stored in the program memory or standard ROM A boot is not executed when the PLC is powered on or RESET status of the CPU module is cleared Section 5 2 11 When the following conditions a and b are met the CPU module is not operated by the...

Страница 279: ...ms may be taken per 1k step 4k bytes at a boot When boot is executed from the ATA card When boot is executed from the standard ROM with the ATA card installed e When data in the program memory are changed at power OFF ON or reset If the data in the program memory are changed when the programmable controller is powered OFF ON or the reset operation of the CPU module is performed after sequence prog...

Страница 280: ...d monitor the files The files are displayed as shown below a File name 1 File name structure and file specification Each file has a file name up to 8 single byte characters 4 double byte characters and extension 3 single byte characters Create file name with capital letters only Extensions are automatically added depending on types set at the time of creating a file 2 Characters unavailable for fi...

Страница 281: ...tters ABC and abc are distinguished For Universal model QCPU Since the single byte small letters and the single byte capital letters are not distinguished specify the file name with either letters Both ABC and abc are treated as ABC Remark Since the double byte capital letters are distinguished from the double byte small letters specify the file name with the capital letters In double byte letters...

Страница 282: ...PU module QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection a Parameter valid drive specification method Specify a parameter valid drive in the setting of the DIP switches SW2 SW3 on the CPU module b Valid parameter determination timing The valid parameters are determined at the following timing When the programmable controller is powered ON at power ON When the reset operation of the ...

Страница 283: ...hart to specify a parameter storage drive Table5 12 Priority order of the drives Priority Parameter valid drive High Low 1 Drive 0 Program memory 2 Drive 1 Memory card RAM 3 Drive 2 Memory card ROM 4 Drive 3 Standard ROM No boot file setting No No parameter in the program memory No No parameter in the memory card Operate with following the concepts of the parameter valid drive No No parameter Powe...

Страница 284: ...rive where the detected parameters are stored When storing the parameters using the Write to PLC operation of GX Developer the valid parameter determination timing differs depending on the drive where parameters are stored 1 When parameters are stored to the drive different from the one where the parameters in operation are stored Parameters are validated according to the order of priority set to ...

Страница 285: ...alid parameters Parameter valid drive setting 5 61 1 Overview 2 Performance Specification 3 Sequence Program Configuration and Execution Conditions 4 I O Nunber Assignment 5 Memories and Files Handled by CPU Module 6 Functions 7 Communication using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module Memo ...

Страница 286: ...r online change This area is used when online change that increases the number of steps is performed by GX Developer When such an online change is performed by GX Developer the number of remaining allocate memory for online change is displayed 1 Default number of allocate memory for online change The default setting is 500 steps 2000 bytes 2 Changing the number of allocate memory for online change...

Страница 287: ...pacity of the crea ted program can be confirmed POINT 1 The program capacity displayed during programming by GX Developer is the capacity of the file header and execution program and does not include the capacity of the allocate memory for online change 500 steps Example The capacity of the program having the execution program area of 491 steps is displayed on GX Developer as shown below The file ...

Страница 288: ...from the target memory Write to PLC Writes files to the program memory or SRAM card Writes files to the standard ROM Verify with PLC Verifies the target memory and GX Developer files Write the program memory to ROM Batch writes the files stored in the program memory to the Flash card Batch writes the files stored in the program memory to the standard ROM Write to PLC Flash ROM Batch writes the spe...

Страница 289: ... of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module Can be executed Can be executed on password match Cannot be executed 1 The following table indicates the meanings of the symbols in the operability field Operability 1 Process CPU Operability 1 Redundant CPU Operability 1 Universal model QCPU A B C D A B C D A B C Symbol Description A When a write inhibit password is set to the file B...

Страница 290: ...ess from other GX Developers to the file being written Also it does not allow data to be written from other GX Developers to the file being accessed When writing data from multiple GX Developers to the same file start the processing of next GX Developer after the processing of one GX Developer is completed 3 Simultaneous access from multiple GX Developers to different files The CPU module allows s...

Страница 291: ...ng 64 Parameter Default 522 increases depending on the parameter setting Reference Boot setting 94 CC Link IE controller network setting made Max 7214 increased MELSECNET H setting made Max 6180 increased Ethernet setting made Max 922 increased CC Link setting made Max value of the table below increased The values of the table below indicate the increment of each module Remote password setting mad...

Страница 292: ...able below increased The values of the table below indicate the increment of each module Remote password setting made 64 20 number of target modules 10 max 164 increased Sequence program 136 1 4 number of steps number of allocate memory for online change Device comment 74 sum of comment data sizes of devices Comment data size of one device 10 10250 a 40 b a Quotient of device points 256 b Remainde...

Страница 293: ...for files High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Continued Function Rough file capacity unit byte Sampling trace file 362 number of word device points number of bit device points 12 N1 N2 N3 number of word device points 2 number of bit device points 16 2 number of traces total number of traces 2 The following values are added to the N1 to N3 corresponding to the items set in trace A...

Страница 294: ...ansfer between data links 6 12 Number of transfersettings 86 Number of modules MELSECNET H setting made Max 6180 module increased Ethernet setting made Max 922 module increased CC Link setting made Max value of the table below increased The values of the table below indicate the increment of each module Remote password setting made 92 number of target modules 10 max 172 increased Sequence program ...

Страница 295: ...ill be the number of executing programs Remark Refer to Section 5 4 4 for the memory capacity calculation example Table5 16 Memory capacity calculation for files Universal model QCPU Continued Function Rough file capacity unit byte Sampling trace file 362 number of word device points number of bit device points 12 N1 N2 N3 number of word device points 2 number of bit device points 16 2 number of t...

Страница 296: ... 07031 or earlier 4 512 bytes for the Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU whose first 5 digits of serial No are 02091 or earlier Table5 18 File size units of CPU modules classified by memory areas Module name Memory area File size unit of program memory standard ROM Flash card 1 Standard RAM Q00JCPU 1 step 4 bytes Q00CPU Q01CPU 4 byte Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU 128 steps 512 bytes 2 512 byte Q12HCPU 256 steps 1024 by...

Страница 297: ...PU do not support the use of the Q3MEM 4MBS and Q3MEM 8MBS 2 Memory capacity calculation example The following indicates an example of calculating the memory capacity when the parameter and sequence program files are written to the program memory a Conditions 1 Write target CPU module Q25HCPU 2 Written files 1 Refer to Section 5 4 3 for the file capacity 2 Indicates the program capacity file heade...

Страница 298: ...e size unit 2 Calculation of program capacity The program capacity is the sequence program capacity allocate memory for online change In this example it is 525 steps 500 steps 1025 steps However the file occupies a capacity of 1536 steps 6144 bytes since it is stored on the program memory in file size unit 512 step unit for the Q25HCPU in this example Figure 5 45 Capacity occupied by file stored i...

Страница 299: ...Files Handled by CPU Module 6 Functions 7 Communication using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module 3 Calculation result Table5 21 Memory capacity calculation result File name File capacity Memory capacity PARAM QPA 564 bytes 512 steps 2048 bytes MAIN QPG Sequence program capacity 525 steps 1536 steps 6144 bytes Allocate memory for online change 500...

Страница 300: ... depending on the file capacity 2 Unless the number of allocate memory for online change is decreased the file may not be stored into the High Performance model QCPU depending on the file capacity Process CPU Legends Write to PLC enabled Restriction on write to PLC 1 Because of different file size units the file may not be stored into the High Performance model QCPU depending on the file capacity ...

Страница 301: ...nt scan Executes the program in a set time interval regardless of the program scan time Section 6 2 Latch function Retains the device data even at power OFF or reset Section 6 3 Output status selection when the status changed from STOP to RUN Selects the output Y status outputting the same status prior to STOP or clearing the status when the CPU module status is switched from STOP to RUN Section 6...

Страница 302: ...d program using GX Developer Section 6 11 2 Enforced ON OFF of external I O Forcibly turns ON OFF the external I O of the CPU module using GX Developer 1 Section 6 11 3 Executional conditioned device test Changes a device value within the specified step of a sequence program Section 6 11 4 Online program change Writes programs when the CPU module is in the RUN status Section 6 12 Program monitor l...

Страница 303: ...rupt pointer I49 Section 6 22 Interrupt from intelligent function module Executes an interrupt program at the time of interrupt request from the intelligent function module Section 6 23 Serial communication function Connects the RS 232 interface of the Q00CPU or Q01CPU and the personal computer display device with the RS 232 cable and performs data communication using the MC protocol Section 6 24 ...

Страница 304: ...erature adjustment in the loop that uses the S PID or S 2PID instruction 4 Redundant function Configures a redundant system including two sets of CPU modules power supply modules network modules or main base units 5 System switching between control system and standby system function Control system and standby system switches the control system to the standby system or the standby system to the con...

Страница 305: ... O refresh is performed before sequence program execution Using the constant scan function the I O refresh intervals can be made constant if the sequence program execution time varies Note1 Note1 Scan time when constant scan is not used Scan time when constant scan setting is set to 7 ms Scan time when constant scan is set to 10 ms during multiple program executionNote6 1 Figure 6 1 Constant scan ...

Страница 306: ... can be set within the following range For Basic model QCPU 1 to 2000ms set in 1ms unit For High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU or Universal model QCPU When executing constant scanning set the constant scanning time When not executing a constant scanning leave the constant scanning time blank Figure 6 2 When constant scanning is set to 10ms Set the constant scanning time ...

Страница 307: ...setting time the CPU module detects PRG TIME OVER error code 5010 In this case the constant scan setting is ignored and the sequence program is executed based on its scan time If the sequence program scan time is longer than the WDT setting time the CPU module detects a WDT error In this case the program execution is stopped WDT Set Time Constant Scan Set Time Sequence Program maximum Scan Time Fi...

Страница 308: ...g setting is specifiedNote6 3 The communication service processing with peripherals such as GX Developer and intelligent function modules is enabled during the waiting time until next scan starts by specifying the service processing setting in GX Developer Section 6 25 2 Note2 Basic Redundant Universal UD Note6 2 Note6 2 Note6 2 Since the Basic model QCPU cannot use low speed execution type progra...

Страница 309: ... excess over 0 5ms Also PRG TIME OVER error code 5010 is detected Refer to the following manual for the maximum processing time of one instruction QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions b When interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executedNote6 4 Interrupt is enabled while an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed If constant scan time r...

Страница 310: ...ion is the same independently of whether latch is used or not 3 Applications of latch function Latch can be used to hold the data which is being managed by continuous control to continue control if the PLC is powered OFF reset operation is performed or a power failure longer than the permissible momentary power failure time occurs 4 Devices that can be latched The following devices can be latched ...

Страница 311: ... Module 6 Functions 7 Communication using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module 5 Latch range setting The latch range is set in the Device tab of the PLC parameter dialog box on GX Developer The latch range can be set in two types the latch clear operation enable range and the latch clear operation disable range Figure 6 4 Latch range setting ...

Страница 312: ...nd extended link register W assign a part of the file register area If Use the same file name as the program is selected on the PLC file tab of PLC parameter the latch range of the file register ZR extended data register D and extended link register W cannot be set All data in the file register is latched When switching the file register file to be used with the QDRSET instruction the latch range ...

Страница 313: ...to latch since processing for latch is not performed b Universal model QCPU Perform processing for latch at the time of END processing which prolongs the scan time When latching a device consider the prolonging scan time Section 10 1 2 11 POINT For the Universal model QCPU reduce the number of latch points latch 1 setting latch 2 setting and latch relay L as much as possible to minimize the prolon...

Страница 314: ...dule If boot run is executed by the CPU module the battery is required for latch Take care that if the battery connector is disconnected from the connector of the CPU module when PLC is turned off the latch range device memory is not retained but becomes undefined c When start mode of Redundant CPU is hot start mode When the start mode is the hot start mode the data not set to be within the latch ...

Страница 315: ... in the RUN status into the PLC and turns all outputs Y OFF Status when changing from STOP to RUN can be selected from the following two options with parameters in GX Developer The output Y status prior to STOP is output The output Y is cleared 2 Setting applications Using a holding circuit or similar it is possible to select whether the output is resumed from the previous status or not when the S...

Страница 316: ... Output Y is cleared The output Y is OFF status The output Y will be output after the sequence program operation is executed Refer to 5 for the operation when forcibly turning ON the output Y in STOP status Figure 6 9 Operation when Change from STOP Status to RUN Status STOP status RUN status Clear the output Y status YES Set Previous state default Output the output Y status right before changing ...

Страница 317: ...e STOP status to the RUN status in the PLC system of the PLC parameter dialog box 5 Precaution If an output Y is forcibly turned ON when the CPU is in STOP status the output Y when changing from STOP status to RUN status is as shown in Table6 4 Figure 6 10 PLC system screen Table6 4 Output when changing from STOP status to RUN status after forcibly turning ON output Y in STOP status Output mode wh...

Страница 318: ...7 5 2 Clock operation at power OFF and momentary power failure Clock operation is continued by the internal battery of the CPU module during power OFF of the PLC or when a power failure longer than the permissible momentary power failure time occurs 3 Clock Data Clock data is used in the CPU module and includes the data indicated in Table6 5 Table6 5 Clock data details Data Name Contents Year Four...

Страница 319: ... Method to Write from the Program When using a program change the clock data with the clock data write instruction DATEWR Figure 6 12 shows a program for writing the set clock data to D0 to D6 with the clock data write instruction DATEWR Refer to the following manual for details of the DATEWR instruction Q QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions POINT 1 When the clock data is cha...

Страница 320: ... the following manual for details of the DATERD instruction and S P DATERD instruction Q QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions POINT Time Data can be written to and read from by special relays SM210 to SM213 and special registers SD210 to SD213 Refer to Appendix 1 for details on special relay Refer to Appendix 2 for details on special registers Figure 6 13 Program that stores c...

Страница 321: ...to the CPU module normal clock operation cannot be performed However if the data is impossible as time an error will not occur when it is within the range given in 3 of this section d Use for clock data of 1 1000 sec 1 Function that clock data of 1 1000 sec can be use The clock data can be used with only the following instructions S P DATERD S P DATE S P DATE The clock data cannot be used with ins...

Страница 322: ...ions Table6 7 Accuracy of Basic model QCPU Ambient Temperature Accuracy Day difference S 0 3 2 to 5 27 TYP 1 98 25 2 57 to 5 27 TYP 2 22 55 11 68 to 3 65 TYP 2 64 Table6 8 Accuracy of High Performance model QCPU and Process CPU Ambient Temperature Accuracy Day difference S 0 3 18 to 5 25 TYP 2 12 25 3 93 to 5 25 TYP 1 9 55 14 69 to 3 53 TYP 3 67 Table6 9 Accuracy of Redundant CPU Ambient Temperatu...

Страница 323: ...emote RUN STOP Section 6 6 1 Remote PAUSE Section 6 6 2 Remote RESET Section 6 6 3 Remote LATCH CLEAR Section 6 6 4 6 6 1 Remote RUN STOP 1 Definition of Remote RUN STOP The remote RUN STOP performs RUN STOP of the CPU module externally with the CPU module RUN STOP switch RUN STOP RESET switch for the Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU at RUN 2 Applications of remote RUN STOP Using remote R...

Страница 324: ...r dialog box of GX Developer The device ranges that can be set are shown in Table6 11 By turning the set RUN contact ON OFF the remote RUN STOP can be performed When the RUN contact is OFF the CPU module enters the RUN status When the RUN contact is ON the CPU module enters the STOP status Table6 11 Device ranges that can be set to RUN contact CPU module Available device range Basic model QCPU Inp...

Страница 325: ...emote RUN STOP from an external device using the MC protocol command Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual c Method with link dedicated instructions of the CC Link IE controller network module or MELSECNET H network module The remote RUN STOP operation by the link dedicated instructions of the CC Link IE controller network module or MELSECNET H network module can change th...

Страница 326: ...ed using Redundant CPU 1 When both systems are not specified on remote operation screen Remote RUN STOP is performed for only the system specified in the connection target settings 2 When both systems are specified on remote operation screen Remote RUN STOP is performed for both the control system and standby system However remote operation for both systems is enabled only when the Redundant CPU i...

Страница 327: ...te PAUSE method Remote PAUSE operation can be performed either by the PAUSE contact or by GX Developer or external device using MC protocol a Method with PAUSE Contact The PUASE contact is set at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box of GX Developer The device ranges that can be set are shown in Table6 12 The PAUSE status contact SM204 is turned on when the END processing is ex...

Страница 328: ...C protocol command Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual When the END processing is performed for the scan where the remote PAUSE command was accepted the PAUSE status contact SM204 is turned on When the scan after the PAUSE status contact is turned on is executed to the END process it enters the PAUSE status and stops the calculations When the remote RUN command is receiv...

Страница 329: ...t SM204 b When redundant system is configured using Redundant CPU 1 When both systems are not specified on remote operation screen Remote PAUSE is executed for only the system specified in the target connection settings 2 When both systems are specified on remote operation screen Remote PAUSE is performed for both the control system and standby system However remote operation for both systems is e...

Страница 330: ...SET method Remote RESET operation can be performed by only GX Developer or external device using MC protocol To perform the remote RESET follow the following steps At the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box check the Allow check box at the Remote reset section and then write parameters to the CPU module When the CPU module is in RUN status use remote STOP to arrange the STOP stat...

Страница 331: ...h RUN STOP RESET switch for the Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU in the STOP position the CPU module enters into the STOP status With the RUN STOP switch RUN STOP RESET switch for the Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU in the RUN position the CPU module enters into the RUN status POINT 1 If remote RESET is performed with the CPU module stopping due to an error note that the CPU mod...

Страница 332: ...remote RESET is performed for the control system both systems are reset If remote RESET is executed for the standby system an error error code 4240H will occur 2 When RUN STOP status differs between control system and standby system in backup mode When executing remote RESET with the control system in the STOP status also place the standby system in the STOP status System switching will occur if r...

Страница 333: ...ly to the Redundant CPU of the standby system Execute remote RESET via the standby system module e g remote RESET using MC protocol 4 When remote operation is performed from the other path in backup mode As described in Section 6 6 5 3 remote operation cannot be performed from other GX Developer for the CPU module that is executing remote operation When remote operation is performed from other pat...

Страница 334: ...lear follow the following steps Use the remote STOP to bring the CPU module to STOP status Use the Latch Clear to bring the CPU module to the Latch Clear status Operate GX Developer by choosing Online Remote operation Use the MC protocol command to execute control from an external device using the MC protocol Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual To return the High Perform...

Страница 335: ...ution of remote latch clear Devices that are not latched are cleared when the remote latch clear is performed d When redundant system is configured using Redundant CPU 1 When both systems are not specified on remote operation screen Remote latch clear is performed for only the system specified in the connection target settings 2 When both systems are specified on remote operation screen Remote lat...

Страница 336: ...velopers When remote operations are performed from the same GX Developer the status of the remote operation that is executed last will be effective 3 Remote Operations from Multiple GX Developers Remote operations from multiple GX Developers via other stations cannot be performed to the CPU module where remote operations from single GX Developer are being performed a Remote RUN executed by GX Deve...

Страница 337: ...hanges the input response times of each Q series corresponding module Table6 14 indicates the modules of which input response time can be changed and the applicable setting times The above Q series corresponding modules import external input in the set input response time Table6 14 Modules of which input response time can be changed Module of which input response time can be changed Type Applicabl...

Страница 338: ... response time in the I O assignment of the PLC parameter dialog box 1 Make I O assignment 2 Select the button 3 Set the input response time on the I O module intelligent function module detail setting screen Figure 6 23 Input response time setting Detailed setting 1 Make I O assignment 2 Select Detailed setting 3 Select I O response time ...

Страница 339: ...d input response time by taking into consideration the operating environment of an input module in use c When AnS A series corresponding input module is usedNote6 6 Note6 No change can be made to the input response time of an AnS A Series corresponding input module When the input response speed is set to the slot of the AnS A series compatible input module or interrupt module the settings will be ...

Страница 340: ...gnment setting of the PLC parameter dialog box 1 Make I O assignment 2 Select the button 3 Choose Clear or Hold for the slot to which the error time output mode is set The default is Clear 3 Precautions The error time output mode setting is made valid when When the PLC is powered OFF and then ON When the CPU module s RESET switch is set to neutral position Failure to perform either operation after...

Страница 341: ...ccurs in the intelligent function module or interrupt module 2 Hardware Error time PLC Operation Mode Setting Make the hardware error time PLC operation mode setting in the I O assignment setting of the PLC parameter dialog box 1 Make I O assignment setting 2 Select the button 3 Choose the hardware error time PLC operation mode of the slot to which the hardware error time PLC operation mode is set...

Страница 342: ...r 2 Timing when switch setting is written The specified switch setting is written from the CPU module to the corresponding intelligent function modules and interrupt modules when the PLC is powered on or the CPU module is unreset i e CPU module s RESET switch is set to the neutral position Figure 6 26 Sequence until switch setting is written to modules GX Developer Intelligent function module swit...

Страница 343: ...g the Switches of the Intelligent Function Modules and Interrupt Modules At the I O assignment tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box specify the desired switch setting Select Intelli in the Type column of a slot for which to set the switches of the intelligent function modules and interrupt modules 1 Make I O assignment 2 Select the button 3 Set the module switches Figure 6 27 Switch setting ...

Страница 344: ...e GX Developer Version 6 SW6D5C GPPW E or later are made by setting the type to Interruption When using GX Developer version 5 SW5D5C GPPW E or earlier to set the interrupt module switches set the type to Intelli Refer to the following manual for further details on the interruption module s switch settings Building Block I O Module User s Manual d Timing when settings are ensured The switch settin...

Страница 345: ...e versions of CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 5 4 When using the Forced ON OFF of external I O in the Universal model QCPU check the versions of CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 5 5 When using the Executional conditioned device test in the Universal model QCPU check the versions of CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 5 2 Monitor request processing timing and displayed data The CPU ...

Страница 346: ...ocal devices for execution of multiple programs makes it possible to monitor local device data Note8 Note9 Basic Universal UD Note6 8 Note6 8 The Basic model QCPU cannot execute monitor with monitor conditions setting When setting the monitor condition in the Universal model QCPU check the versions of CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 5 Basic Universal UD Note6 8 Note6 8 Basic Note6 9 The Bas...

Страница 347: ...r ladder monitor Choose Online Monitor Monitor condition setup to open the Monitor Condition dialog box The following shows an example in which to start a monitoring operation at the leading edge of Y70 Note10 Figure 6 28 Monitor condition screen The Basic model QCPU cannot execute monitor with monitor condition setting When setting the monitor condition in the Universal model QCPU check the versi...

Страница 348: ...ous to execution of the specified step becomes the specified The specification method for the execution status is indicated below When changing from non execution status to executing status P When changing from executing status to non execution status F Always when executing only ON Always when not executing only OFF Always regardless of status Always ...

Страница 349: ...n the middle of the AND OR block The monitor execution condition is established when X1 turns ON in Figure 6 30 The ON OFF status of X0 does not affect the establishment of the monitor execution condition If the beginning of a ladder block not at Step 0 is specified in Step No as a detailed condition monitor data is collected when the execution status of the instruction immediately before executio...

Страница 350: ...revious to execution of the specified status or the status current value of the specified bit device word device is specified POINT When Step No 100 P Word Device D1 K5 is specified as the detailed condition in the following circuit a monitor execution condition is established at the leading edge of the Step 100 where D1 5 Besides the monitor interval of GX Developer depends on the processing spee...

Страница 351: ...status P When the operation of the specified step changes from the execution status to the non execution status F Always only when the operation of the specified step is in execution ON Always only when the operation of the specified step is in non execution OFF Always regardless of the status of the operation of the specified step Always When Step No is not specified the monitoring operation is s...

Страница 352: ...at the same time take note of the following High speed monitoring can be performed by increasing 1k step in the system area for other station s monitor file when formatting of program memory Up to 15 stations can be set as the station monitor file but the program space will be reduced If the monitor condition and or monitor stop condition are set only one user can perform monitoring f Status where...

Страница 353: ...the same personal computer cannot execute online functions using the same route used for monitor The following applications must be noted GX Developer Application using MX Component MX Sheet If online functions of other applications are executed using the same route for monitor execution the following situations may occur No response is returned for online functions from the CPU module An online c...

Страница 354: ...al devices D0 to 99 specified It assumes that these three programs are executed in the order of A B C END processing A B Note11 Note12 Table6 17 Data displayed when three programs are executed Setting Monitor Device D0 Local device D100 Global device When local devices are specified D0 in Program C is monitored D100 is monitored after Program C is executed When local devices are not specified D0 i...

Страница 355: ...e monitor setting is made and Program B is displayed for example this makes it possible to monitor the local devices in Program B Figure 6 35 Local device monitor example GX Developer The local device monitor is set and the program B is monitored The local device data of the program B is displayed EX In case that the local device is from D0 to D99 D0 4 is displayed when X10 is on and D99 8 is disp...

Страница 356: ...s connected to a RS 232 serial communication module of the CPU module c Monitor of local devices in stand by type program When the local devices in the stand by type program are monitored the scan time increases since the local device data are saved and restored Section 10 14 1 d Local device monitor of fixed scan execution type program When the local devices in the fixed scan execution type progr...

Страница 357: ...he external I O can be forcibly turned ON OFF on the screen displayed by selecting Online Debug Forced input output registration cancellation in GX Developer The information registered for ON OFF will be cancelled with GX Developer operations Note13 Figure 6 37 Forced input output registration cancellation screen Note13 Universal UD Note6 12 High Performance Note6 12 When using the Forced ON OFF f...

Страница 358: ...operation Forced ON OFF cancellation Performs sequence program operations with external input Outputs the results of sequence program operations externally 1 Forced ON Performs sequence program operations in the forced ON status Outputs ON externally regardless of the results of sequence program operations 1 Forced OFF Performs sequence program operations in the forced OFF status Outputs OFF exter...

Страница 359: ... is executed POINT When system is switched in the redundant system the new control system CPU module continues forced ON OFF using the data registered in the old control system CPU module Figure 6 38 I O operation when the Forced ON OFF function is executed M0 X0 Y10 Y10 Y11 M1 END Y10 device enforced OFF X0 device enforced OFF Y10 output OFF X0 input ON External input forcibly set at OFF Set at O...

Страница 360: ...RX RY of CC Link to be refreshed When forcibly turning ON OFF the devices outside the above refresh ranges ex empty slots only I O in the CPU module device memory are turned ON OFF and the results are not output externally POINT In a multiple CPU system inputs and outputs of controlled modules are targeted for forced ON OFF Even when inputs and outputs of non controlled modules are registered for ...

Страница 361: ...le to be refreshed from LX of CC Link IE controller network or MELSECNET H Assumes the refreshed ON OFF status from CC Link IE controller network or MELSECNET H Input of CPU module to be refreshed from RX of CC Link Assumes the refreshed ON OFF status from CC Link Input other than above outside of the refresh range Operation result in the sequence program is reflected Maintains the enforced ON OFF...

Страница 362: ...ND processing output refresh During execution of the COM instruction output refresh During execution of instructions using direct access outputs DY OUT SET DELTA RST PLS PLF FF LDF MC During execution of the RFS or MTR instruction During execution of instructions used for a system interrupt PLSY PWM I O of CPU module to be refreshed from LX LY of CC Link IE controller network or MELSECNET H During...

Страница 363: ...ed ON OFF remind that SD840 is used to check the status for the Executional conditioned device test function as well i Forced ON OFF registration from multiple GX DeveloperNote6 16 Forced ON OFF of external I O can be registered to the same CPU module from multiple GX Developer connected via network When forced ON OFF registration is performed to the same CPU module from multiple GX Developer note...

Страница 364: ...nction description 1 Device Enter the I O number for which enforced ON OFF is to be set or for which enforced ON OFF is to be cancelled 2 Registration status displayed area Displays the registration status of registered enforced input and output 3 Update Displays the registration status loaded from CPU module 4 Set forced ON OFF Performed enforced ON OFF registration for specified devices 5 Cancel...

Страница 365: ...ced I O for the new control system system that was changed from the standby system to the control system by system switching An error error code 4240H will occur if the enforced I O is registered canceled for the standby system b Power OFF to ON or reset in separate mode When the control system is powered OFF or reset in the separate mode the registered enforced I O is canceled The operation perfo...

Страница 366: ...igure 6 40 Operation of Executional conditioned device test Figure 6 41 Operation example of Executional conditioned device test Universal UD Note6 19 Note6 20 Redundant High Performance Basic Process Note6 20 Note6 20 Note6 20 When using the Executional conditioned device test in the Universal model QCPU check the versions of CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 5 Universal UD Note6 19 The Basi...

Страница 367: ... Debug function usage Appendix 2 By the display on the screen for checking the registration status in GX Developer 4 d in this section POINT 1 The MODE LED also flashes in green when the Forced ON OFF function for external I O is used To check the execution status using the MODE LED check the status of the Forced ON OFF function as well Section 6 11 3 2 When using SD840 to check the execution stat...

Страница 368: ...n Even though the same device is specified if the execution timing differs two settings can be registered for one step one for Before executing instruction and the other for After executing instruction Figure 6 42 Screen for registering executional conditioned device test settings Table6 23 Items on the screen for registering executional conditioned device test settings No Item Setting range For b...

Страница 369: ...s set in the following order D100 F and then D100Z0 Real number single precision both devices are registered 2 Step specification for executional conditioned device test registration Any step number 0 to step number for the END instruction in a sequence program can be specified POINT Be sure to specify the start step of each instruction 3 Execution timing specification Timing of changing a device ...

Страница 370: ...setting is registered specifying the step for the END instruction the execution timing is restricted to Before executing instruction only If After executing instruction is set the CPU module returns a registration error to the programming tool Table6 24 Instructions that do not change device values No Classification Instruction Operation 1 Stop STOP When the execution condition for an instruction ...

Страница 371: ... device test Check disable executional conditioned device test 1 Number of settings that can be disabled simultaneously in one scan Eight executional conditioned device test settings can be disabled simultaneously in one scan When nine or more executional conditioned device test settings are to be disabled simultaneously using a programming tool they will be disabled over multiple scans c Batch di...

Страница 372: ...tered or disabled In the following cases executional conditioned device test setting cannot be registered or disabled When multiple settings are to be registered all settings cannot be registered if any of the settings applies to the cases below 1 When executional conditioned device test settings cannot be registered Specified program does not exist Specified step does not exist Specified device d...

Страница 373: ...ity to other functions Monitor condition setting Sampling trace function trace point Sampling trace function trigger point Scan time measurement start step Scan time measurement end step c Disabling executional conditioned device test settings Executional conditioned device test setting can be disabled by any of the following operations other than by the operation from GX Developer Powering OFF ON...

Страница 374: ...ditioned device test registration 1 Online change in ladder mode If executional conditioned device test setting has been registered in the ladder block to be changed online the CPU module disables the corresponding setting Example 1 Step numbers of registrations 1 to 3 are specified in the executional conditioned device test settings When the ladder block including the registration 2 is changed an...

Страница 375: ...d the registrations 1 to 3 are all disabled Example 3 When a ladder block is added by the Online change the executional conditioned device test setting included in the ladder block followed after the added ladder block If the Online change shown in Figure 6 50 is executed the registration 2 is disabled 2 Online change in file units All executional conditioned device test settings registered to the...

Страница 376: ...pecified device name is specified to register the executional conditioned device test setting the module does not check whether the specified device is within the setting range If the indirectly specified device is out of the device range or on the boundary of devices a device value will not be changed within the specified step h File register specification If file register is specified to registe...

Страница 377: ...sed QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 6 12 1 Online change in ladder mode 1 Writing data in the circuit mode during RUN Status Writing data in the circuit mode during RUN is a function to write a program during the CPU module RUN status The program can be changed without stopping the process in CPU module program by performing writing data in the circuit mode during RUN status Table6 27 Onli...

Страница 378: ...el QCPU Process CPU and Redundant CPU The memory enabled for online change is the program memory b Universal model QCPU The memory enabled for online change is the program cache memory program memory 3 Number of steps enabled for online change at once A maximum of 512 steps can be written at once during RUN Figure 6 52 Outline of online change via network MELSECNET H PLC to PLC network Change by G...

Страница 379: ... processing will enter into a stand by status for the online change If the online change is executed while the PLOADP PUNLOAD or PSWAPP instruction is executed the execution of the instruction is delayed until the online change is executed Note23 Figure 6 53 Online change processing at execution of low speed execution type program Note24 Basic Redundant Universal UD Note6 21 Note6 21 Note6 21 Sinc...

Страница 380: ...eased when allocate memory for online change are set again The scan time increases when the online change reserve step is re set in online change For increased scan time refer to Section 11 1 3 7 For the prohibited operationsNote6 23 when writing data during RUN when changing T C setting value or at the time of transferring from a program cache memory to a program memory For the prohibited operati...

Страница 381: ...e6 28 Writable data Unwritable data Restricted 1 Writable only when not being accessed by a sequence program 2 Writable for the Universal model QCPU Note26 Table6 28 Files that can be written during RUN by the CPU module Memory Name CPU module built in memories Memory Card RAM Memory Card ROM Program Memory Standard RAM Standard ROM SRAM Card Flash Card ATA Card Parameter Intelligent function modu...

Страница 382: ...X Developer refer to Section 6 12 3 2 A program file can be written to the program memory during RUN in the Universal model QCPU b For the Universal model QCPU A file can be written during RUN regardless of whether empty area exists enough to write a program file 3 Increase in scan time The scan time increases when the file is written during RUN For increased scan time refer to Section 11 1 3 4 Wh...

Страница 383: ...f transferring from a program cache memory to a program memory refer to Section 6 12 3 2 8 Instruction which does not operate normally when writing data during RUN For instructions do not operate normally at write during RUN refer to Section 6 12 3 3 in this section Note27 Note28 High Performance Note6 25 Process Note6 25 When writing a SFC program file online in High Performance model QCPU or Pro...

Страница 384: ...supply of the CPU module after writing data during RUN Or write data of a program memory to a memory card Note6 28 or the standard ROM Note6 29 before resetting the CPU module 3 When boot source memory is Flash card or standard ROM files of boot source are deleted and replaced by files on program memory Set files in the boot source memory to be transferred to the program memory by the boot file se...

Страница 385: ...etting value change or data transfer from the program cache memory to the program memory the operation does not complete normally Execute Write to PLC again if power OFF or reset operation is performed b Operations from GX Developer The following operations cannot be executed during online change TC setting value change or data transfer from the program cache memory to the program memory Execute t...

Страница 386: ...d when the instruction is in a writing range even the execution condition ON OFF is not established at the completion of online change For preventing the trailing edge instruction execution refer to POINT in this section The corresponding instructions are LDF ANDF ORF MEF PLF FCALLP EFCALLP Figure 6 55 Trailing edge instruction operation END 1 scan END END 0 0 0 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ...

Страница 387: ... are PLS P c SCJ instruction When the SCJ instruction is in a writing range and the execution condition is ON at the completion of the writing a jump to the designated pointer occurs even in a scan cycle Figure 6 56 Leading edge instruction operation Figure 6 57 SCJ instruction operation END 1 scan END END 0 0 0 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON X0 status X0 M0 X0 M0 X0 M0 PL...

Страница 388: ... checkbox is not checked Universal model QCPU The Trailing edge instructions are not executed checkbox is checked Note32 Figure 6 58 Option menu screen in GX Developer High Performance Process Redundant Note6 31 Note6 31 Note6 31 Basic Note6 31 The Basic model QCPU does not support the selection of trailing edge instruction execution non execution at online change When selecting the trailing edge ...

Страница 389: ...parison of trailing edge instruction END 1 scan END END 0 0 0 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF X0 status X0 M0 X0 M0 PLF M0 X0 A A Completion of online change The trailing edge instruction is not executed even the execution condition is OFF OFF Operation when Trailing edge instructions are not executed is unchecked a END 1 scan END END 0 0 0 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF X0 ...

Страница 390: ...g T C setting value is prolonged due to automatic transfer of data to a program memory by the time shown in Table 6 26 Ts Scan time s In addition since the number of write to the program memory Flash ROM is limited up to hundred thousand times set the automatic transfer of data to the program memory to be invalid if writing data during RUN or TC setting value change is executed frequently Table6 3...

Страница 391: ...is selected data is transferred to the program memory When No is selected data is not transferred to the program memory 3 When No is selected in the message box be sure to execute Program memory batch transfer by GX Developer GX Developer Operating Manual Program transfer status can be checked by the special relay SM165 Note6 32Note33 When the SM165 is ON the program memory batch transfer has not ...

Страница 392: ...asurement Program monitor list Section 6 13 1 Interrupt program monitor list Section 6 13 2 Scan time measurement Section 6 13 3 6 13 1 Program list monitor 1 Definition of Program Monitor List This is a function to display the processing time of the program being executed The scan time number of times executed and processing time by item can be displayed for each program 2 Using the Program Monit...

Страница 393: ...ed 1 Program The total execution time of the scan execution type program is displayed 2 END operation time The END operation time is displayed 3 Low speed programNote6 34Note35 This indicates the total execution time of a low speed execution type program when making the setting for the execution time of a low speed execution type program or constant scan time 4 Constant waiting The constant scan w...

Страница 394: ...ber of execution times is displayed up to 65535 times and returns to 0 when the 65536th time measurement is made The ex times remains even when the program is stopped Remark When the POFF instruction is executed a non execution processing is performed for one scan The number of executions displayed differs depending on the CPU module High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU The number...

Страница 395: ...gram name cannot be entered as desired b Startup mode The stand by type program can be changed to Scan execution Low speed execution Note6 37 or Fixed scan execution The value set in the program setting of the PLC parameter dialog box is displayed as the default value of fixed scan execution ms or scan be selected as the unit Note38 Note37 Figure 6 62 Startup program screen Note38 Basic Note6 36 U...

Страница 396: ...d execution type and turns off the output at the next scan The program is put in the standby status at and after the next scan Note6 39 Note40 This operation is the same as performed when the POFF instruction is executed Executing After stop output stop for the standby program stops the program after one scan OFF is executed as scan execution For this reason Execute count is also increased by 1 Ex...

Страница 397: ...t in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module POINT Depending on the instruction the output may not turn OFF if After stop output stop is executed For details refer to the section of the POFF instruction in the following manual QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 5 Precaution The scan time of a constant scan execution type program being ex...

Страница 398: ...onitor List Choose Online Monitor Interrupt program monitor list The Interrupt Program Monitor List dialog box appears on screen Figure 6 64 shows an execution example of the interrupt program monitor list a Execute count The number of times the interrupt program was executed is displayed This function starts counting the number when CPU module is in RUN status When the number reaches 65536 times ...

Страница 399: ...the setting on the Scan time measurement screen 3 When subroutine program call instruction exists The time includes the time required for processing subroutines when the subroutine CALL instruction is within the range of scan time measurement 4 When interrupt programs fixed scan execution type programs are executed within the scan time measurement range If interrupts for executing interrupt progra...

Страница 400: ...eginning of the ladder of which scan time will be measured on GX Developer select the monitor mode Choose Online Monitor Scan time measurement to open Scan time Measurement screen dialog box Specify the start step and end step click the button Example When 52 for the start step and 105 for the end step are specified Figure 6 66 Scan time measurement screen Start ...

Страница 401: ... a Measurement range setting Set the measurement range Measurement limit so that the following condition is satisfied Start step End step b Scan time measurement across program files Scan time cannot be measured across program files c Measurement time minimum unit 1 High Performance model QCPU Process CPU and Redundant CPU The measurement time minimum unit is 0 100ms If the measurement time is les...

Страница 402: ...specified end step is not executed due to the JMP instruction When end step is executed before start step Example The start step is specified as next step of the CALL instruction and the end step is specified in a subroutine program called by the CALL instruction 0 3 5 7 10 P0 End step 6 Start step 3 JMP P0 0 3 5 7 10 12 13 P0 End step 9 Start step 3 JMP P0 END The specified end step is not execut...

Страница 403: ...d by CPU Module 6 Functions 7 Communication using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module When start step is executed continuously Example Only the start step is specified in the loop between the FOR and NEXT instructions 3 6 8 10 11 End step 13 Start step 8 FOR K2 NEXT The start step is executed continuously since it is specified in the loop between ...

Страница 404: ...re the number of bytes of sampling trace area is set N1 N2 N3 number of word device points 2 number of bit device points 16 2 1 2 1 Round up result of number of bit device points 16 in the expression to the right of the decimal point 2 The following values are added to the N1 to N3 corresponding to the items set in trace additional information of trace condition settings screen N1 Add 4 at setting...

Страница 405: ...ecial relays in a sequence program the execution status of the sampling trace function can be checked 1 Preparations for sampling trace After writing Trace data conditions and Trace condition settings that are set using GX Developer to the CPU module is completed SM800 sampling trace ready is turned ON SM800 indicates whether the sampling trace can be executed or not 2 Start of sampling trace When...

Страница 406: ...on Figure 6 69 Sampling trace timing chart Trace start request Trigger condition enabled Trace ends by number of trace after trigger Number of trace after trigger Number of all traces SM800 SM801 SM802 SM803 SM804 SM805 Sampling trace ready Sampling trace start Sampling trace executing Sampling trace trigger After sampling trace trigger Sampling trace complete ...

Страница 407: ...ce the sampling trace is interrupted When sampling trace is interrupted the number of traces is cleared When turning on SM801 again trace is restarted Figure 6 70 Sampling trace timing chart When sampling trace is interrupted SM800 SM801 SM802 SM803 SM804 SM805 Sampling trace ready Sampling trace start Sampling trace executing Sampling trace trigger After sampling trace trigger Sampling trace comp...

Страница 408: ...Set the target memory to store the trace data and the file name to write the trace conditions Select either of Standard RAM or Memory card RAM as target memory The trace result is stored into the target memory set in this setting with specified file name 2 Trace execution method Select the trace execution method from below Execute trace after overwriting the current trace setting to the CPU module...

Страница 409: ... point trigger point trace additional information and auto start setting can be set 1 No of traces The No of times sets the number of times to execute the sampling trace from trace execution to trace complete The After trigger number of times sets the number of times to executes the sampling trace from trigger execution to trace complete The setting range for each number of times is shown below Af...

Страница 410: ...nsmission function is set 3 Interrupt pointer of I45 exists in a program 4 EI status with the interrupt mask of I45 is cancelled Detailed Sets the device and step no The setting method and trace data sampling timing is the same as mentioned in Section 6 11 1 when setting the monitor condition setting Also other than above timings data can also be collected at the time of changing word devices in t...

Страница 411: ...tion of TRACE instruction is set as the trigger At the time of trigger operation The trigger operation from GX Developer device is set as the trigger Detailed setting The device and step number is set The setting method and trigger execution timing is the same as mentioned in Section 6 11 1 the monitor condition setting Also other than above timings data can also be collected at the time of writin...

Страница 412: ...l J X J Y J B J SB BL S 2 Word Device Maximum of 50 word devices can be set as follows T current value ST current value C current value D 1 SD W 2 SW R Z ZR U G J W J SW U3E G Universal model QCPU only 1 The extended data register D is also included 2 The extended link register W is also included The following attributes can be set for the above devices Bit device number of digits specification Wo...

Страница 413: ...dition settings The created trace data settings and trace condition settings are written to the target memory set in Trace data setting result storage as sampling trace file Use the button on the Sampling trace screen to write the sampling trace file to the memory card SRAM card POINT When the sampling trace file is stored into the memory card SRAM card multiple sampling trace files can be stored ...

Страница 414: ...tion and starts counting the number of sampling trace executions Stop trace Stops the function and clears the total sampling trace execution count and the execution count after trigger When restarting the function select Start trace again Execute trigger Executes a trigger and starts counting the number of sampling trace executions after trigger The function will be ended when the trace execution ...

Страница 415: ...ting is attempted by powering OFF ON the programmable controller resetting the CPU module or switching the CPU module from STOP to RUN the setting is not re registered regardless of the status of SM829 Forced registration specification of trace setting if a trigger condition has already been satisfied In this case the module is in the status where the sampling trace setting registration has been c...

Страница 416: ...of the bit device for the sampling cycle and the current value of the word device POINT Device details are read under trigger conditions specified in the trigger point setting Sampling is performed for each scan Before the sampling is finished by a trigger operation of a peripheral device data is sampled twice because the sampling timing is the same as that of trigger conditions Figure 6 77 Trace ...

Страница 417: ... the sampling trace can be executed again in the trace setting at the time of registration However the previous trace result cannot be read Also when the trigger condition of the sampling trace is established the latched Trace setting will be cleared since it is not recognized as the trigger condition SM800 trace ready is turned OFF Register Trace setting again by GX Developer 1 When standard RAM ...

Страница 418: ...g of the sampling trace cannot be registered f Registration of the sampling trace when the trigger condition is established Universal model QCPU only When registering the sampling trace in the Universal model QCPU the setting of the sampling trace can be registered by the following procedures even if the trigger condition is established 1 Turn ON SM829 Forced registration specification of trace se...

Страница 419: ...ng trace during execution of sampling trace The first sampling trace continues normally However the second sampling trace cannot be executed j Executing online change Write during RUN Operation will be as follows when sampling trace and online change are executed simultaneously 1 Executing sampling trace during execution of online change When step number is used for specifying the trace point and ...

Страница 420: ...t be executed simultaneously by multiple users For executing from the other GX Developers stop or interrupt the execution time measurement and sampling trace being executed 4 For method of writing to a single file in RUN by multiple users refer to Section 6 15 2 5 The Basic model QCPU does not support the sampling trace function Table6 32 Combined use of Debug function and other functions Function...

Страница 421: ...le 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module 6 15 1 Simultaneous monitoring execution by multiple users 1 Simultaneous monitoring execution by multiple users The CPU module serial communication module or similar module can be simultaneously monitored by multiple GX Developer when they are connected Multiple users can monitor at the same time By setting a station monitor file high speed moni...

Страница 422: ...ng system area so that its radio button is checked Specify the desired k steps in the System Area text box The maximum number of steps that can be set as system areas is as indicated in Table6 33 Only 1k steps are applicable to one monitor file in other station Figure 6 80 System area setting when number of steps is set to 1k steps Table6 33 Maximum number of steps that can be set as system areas ...

Страница 423: ...ions can be executed but the monitor speed decreases The system area is in the same area as the program memory so the area of the stored program decreases when the system area is set c The number of nodes that can be set to monitor at higher speed When multiple nodes are monitoring one CPU module simultaneously a certain number number of user setting system areas k steps 1 of them can be set to mo...

Страница 424: ... pointer is unnecessary 2 Operating procedure for writing to a single file in RUN When multiple users write to one file simultaneously during Run it is necessary to set the RUN write pointer and select Relative step No by pointer in advance a Displaying Program common tab Choose Tools Options on GX Developer and select the Program common tab Note52 Figure 6 81 Simultaneous online change by multipl...

Страница 425: ...module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module b Set Online change and set the Online change method 1 Set Online change while PLC is runnning in After conversion writing behavior 2 Select Absolute step No default or Relative step No by pointer in Step No specification used in writing c Online change execution The specified circuit of the pointer is displayed to write the circuit after con...

Страница 426: ...CPU module is operating correctly the watchdog timer does not time out When the scan time of a sequence program is extended due to the CPU module hardware error or execution of interrupt program fixed scan execution type programNote6 51 and END FEND instruction cannot be executed within the set watchdog timer value the watchdog timer times out Note53 3 When watchdog timer expires When the watchdog...

Страница 427: ...easurement time of the watchdog timer Set the watchdog timer for a desired value by taking such an error into account b Watchdog timer reset when program is executed repeatedly by FOR and NEXT instructions The watchdog timer can also be reset by executing the WDT instruction in a sequence program If the watchdog timer expires while the FOR and NEXT instructions are repetitiously executed reset the...

Страница 428: ...wings Whether the commands used are executed or not executed Whether to execute or not an interrupt program and a fixed scan execution type program Note6 52 Note54 2 To execute at the same scan time at every scan use the constant scan function Section 6 2 Figure 6 84 Watchdog Timer Reset Note54 Internal processing time Sequence program Internal processing time Scan execution type program A Scan ex...

Страница 429: ...le detects an error it turns on ERR LEDs b Error information storage destination and checking When the CPU module detects an error it turns ON the special relay SM0 SM1 and stores the information error code into the special register SD0 When multiple errors are detected error codes of the latest errors are stored in the special register SD0 For error detection use special relays and special regist...

Страница 430: ...de At detection of an error the CPU module executes programs other than the one that has developed the error b Errors that can be set to continue stop the operation The following errors can be set to continue stop the operation when they have occurred 1 Errors that can be set to continue stop the operation in PLC RAS setting of PLC parameter dialog box Computation error Extended instruction error ...

Страница 431: ...eck Carry out fuse blown check c Module verification Verify module d Device range check at index modification Check device range at indexing Note6 54 Note56 e Redundant power supply system diagnostics Diagnose redundant power supply system Note6 54 Note6 55 Note57 Note56Çñ Note57Çñ Basic High Performance Process Redundant Note6 54 Note6 54 Note6 54 Note6 54 Error check items Check device range at ...

Страница 432: ... Diagnostics timing CPU module status LED status CPU module RUN ERR 1 2 3 4 5 Hardware failure CPU error MAIN CPU DOWN Always Stop OFF Flash END instruction not executed END NOT EXECUTE When the END instruction is executed Stop OFF Flash SFC program execution error SFCP END ERROR When SFC program is executed Stop OFF Flash RAM check RAM ERROR When the CPU module is powered on reset Stop OFF Flash ...

Страница 433: ...hen FROM TO instruction is executed When intelligent function module dedicated instruction is executed When END instruction is executed Stop Continue OFF ON Flash ON Control bus error CONTROL BUS ERR When the CPU module is powered on When END instruction is executed When FROM TO instruction is executed When intelligent function module dedicated instruction is executed Always Stop OFF Flash Momenta...

Страница 434: ...ion is executed Stop Continue OFF ON Flash ON 5 Intelligent function module version error SP UNIT VER ERR When the CPU module is powered on reset Stop OFF Flash 5 No parameter MISSING PARA When the CPU module is powered on reset When switched from STOP to RUN Stop OFF Flash Boot error BOOT ERROR When the CPU module is powered on reset Stop OFF Flash Backup error ESTORE ERROR When the CPU module is...

Страница 435: ...A ERROR When the CPU module is powered on reset When switched from STOP to RUN Stop OFF Flash SFC parameter error SFC PARA ERROR When switched from STOP to RUN When writing data to the programmable controller Stop OFF Flash Intelligent function module parameter error SP PARA ERROR When the CPU module is powered on reset Stop OFF Flash Password error REMOTE PASS ERR When the CPU module is powered o...

Страница 436: ...edicated instruction MULTI COM ERROR When the instruction is executed Stop OFF Flash SFC program structure error SFCP CODE ERROR When switched from STOP to RUN Stop OFF Flash SFC block structure error CAN T SET BL When switched from STOP to RUN Stop OFF Flash SFC step structure error CAN T SET S When switched from STOP to RUN Stop OFF Flash SFC execution error SFC EXE ERROR When switched from STOP...

Страница 437: ...ing RUN When the system is switched When both systems are switched to RUN Stop OFF Flash Operation status key switch mismatch OPE MODE DIFF When the CPU module is powered on reset Always Stop Continue OFF ON Flash ON Module mounting configuration mismatch UNIT LAY DIFF Always When the CPU module is powered on reset When tracking cable is connected When operation mode is changed Stop OFF Flash Memo...

Страница 438: ...rol system to standby system occurrence 7 STANDBY Always Continue ON OFF System switching error CAN T SWITCH When system switching is executed Continue ON ON Standby system not started stop error STANDBY SYS DOWN Always Continue ON ON Control system not started stop error CONTROL SYS DOWN Always Stop OFF Flash Program memory cleared PRG MEM CLEAR When program memory copy function is executed Stop ...

Страница 439: ...cs indicates the CPU module status the error message is not displayed in the Current error field on the PLC diagnostics screen of GX Developer This error is displayed in the error history field only 8 Only the Built in Ethernet port QCPU is targeted 9 CPU modules whose serial number first five digits is 10042 or later are targeted POINT In the case of the Redundant CPU the information of the error...

Страница 440: ...stem is configured by the High Performance model QCPU or the Process CPU Note58 Note59 Figure 6 85 List of interrupt pointers corresponding to interrupts due to error occurrence Basic Note6 56 Since the Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU does support interrupt pointers for error occurrence it cannot perform interrupts caused by the error occurrence of the CPU module itself Basic Note6 56 UD...

Страница 441: ...ing after system switching from control system to standby system 1 Special relays Control Stanby Status flag SM1515 SM1516 Special relays SM1515 OFF SM1516 ON indicate the operation of the standby system 2 When changing the tracking target device When programming has been performed to change the tracking target deice in the I41 interrupt program the device of the new standby system is overwritten ...

Страница 442: ...r procedure when multiple errors have occurred When the latest error error stored in the special register SD0 is cleared the error information of the special relays registers SM0 SM1 SM5 SM16 SD0 to 26 is cleared and therefore the information of the errors not cleared cannot be obtained from the special relays registers For the errors that have not been cleared obtain the past errors from the erro...

Страница 443: ...e When the error codes 2100 and 2101 occur canceling the error code 2100 will also cancel the error code 2101 When 2100 and 2111 occur in the error code and error code 2100 is canceled error code 2111 is canceled as well 2 If the cause of the error is not in the CPU module the error cause cannot be resolved if error cancellation is performed using the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 E...

Страница 444: ...g the CPU module for the first time Section 6 5 6 18 1 Basic model QCPU 1 Storage area The 16 latest errors are stored into the latched error history storage memory of the Basic model QCPU 2 Stored data If the same error occurs two or more times while the PLC power is ON the data is stored only once into the error history storage memory 3 Error history clearing method To clear the error history st...

Страница 445: ... the following operations is performed the history file in the memory card is cleared then the 16 points data in the CPU module error history storage memory is transferred to the history file in the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU or Redundant CPU When the history count in the parameter history file is changed in the middle of operation When a memory card which has a different history coun...

Страница 446: ...rotection description Method Valid Timing Remarks CPU as a whole 1 2 All files Prohibits all write control instructions to the CPU module Set the CPU module system setting switch SW1 on Always Valid for devices too Memory card 1 All files Performs drive protect for the memory card and write protect Set write protect switch on the memory card on Always File Program device comment and device initial...

Страница 447: ...d range is set for the specified memory program memory standard memory memory card program file device comment fileNote6 59 and device initial file Note61 2 Operation that can be disabled by password Either of the following two descriptions is to be registered The file name is not displayed and write read cannot be performed as well Write cannot be performed to the file Read only If the password i...

Страница 448: ... Data type Displays the type of a file stored in the target memory c Data name Displays a filename of a file stored in the target memory d Registration Displays an asterisks that indicates a password protected file e Password Defines or changes a password The registration condition can be set by specifying the password f Registration Condition 1 Write Protect Write operation is restricted by a pas...

Страница 449: ...cation with Intelligent Function Module 4 Precautions The password registered to a file can not read out from the file If the password can not be remembered file operation other than following can not be performed Take notes of the password registered and keep it on hand a For Basic model QCPU Program memory Format PLC memory Standard ROM Write the program memory to ROM b For High Performance mode...

Страница 450: ...o the neutral position the remote password is transferred to the modules that accept remote password setting 3 in this section Note62 Figure 6 87 Outline of remote password transfer Basic High Performance Note6 60 Note6 60 When using the remote password for the Basic model QCPU or High Performance model QCPU check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 1 Appendix 4 2 Basic High...

Страница 451: ...tails on the remote password of Built in Ethernet port QCPU refer to Section 7 7 4 Remote password lock unlock processing Unlock the remote password of the serial communication module via a modem or that of the Ethernet module via Ethernet When the remote password is matched this enables the access to the CPU module Figure 6 88 Outline of remote password lock unlock processing performed for Ethern...

Страница 452: ...ules for which remote passwords can be set by GX Developer It is not the maximum number of modules mounted in the system that uses the CPU module Refer to the following manual for the maximum number of modules mounted in the system QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Table6 38 Number of set modules according to GX Developer version GX Developer Version Module Name Maximum...

Страница 453: ...n Table6 39 Setting items on Remote password setting screen Field Description Setup range Selection range Password settings Remote password entry Within 4 characters alphanumeric character special symbol Password active module settings Model name Model selection QnUDE H CPU QJ71E71 QJ71C24 QJ71CM0 Start XY Module s head address setup Basic model QCPU 0000H to 03E0H High Performance model QCPU Proc...

Страница 454: ... settings i e DIP switches to the standard ROM or memory card that stores the parameter file If the DIP switches are set to the program memory boot run will not be executed normally b Remote password change In the project data list of GX Developer choose Parameter Remote pass to display the Remote password setting screen Change the password and write the new password to the CPU module c Remote pas...

Страница 455: ... CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module Remark Refer to the following manuals for further details on the remote password function When using Built in Ethernet port QCPU Section 7 7 When using Serial Communication Modules Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module Users Manual Application When using Ethernet Modules Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual Basic ...

Страница 456: ...ed in the system monitor refer to Figure 6 90 and Figure 6 91 Installed status Parameter status Module s detailed information Product information This section uses the system monitor screen of GX Developer Version 8 24A or later for explanation Figure 6 90 System monitor screen except for Redundant CPU Figure 6 91 System monitor screen for Redundant CPU 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 10 5 6 7 8 9 11 4 ...

Страница 457: ...parameter s I O allocation and the actual status are different Match the I O assignment of the PLC parameter dialog box to the actual mounting status When the Redundant base unit is used the power supply module mounting status is also displayed Note6 65 Note6 66 Note68 3 Base Enables the status of the modules mounted onto the base unit in use to be confirmed When there is at least one error module...

Страница 458: ... modules mounted on the base units to be confirmed b Base information Enables the base name the number of slots the base type and the number of modules mounted onto the base for the selected base unit to be confirmed 8 Product Information List The individual information type series model number of points head I O control CPU serial No function version and product number 1 of the mounted CPU module...

Страница 459: ...tem configuration the detailed information of power supply module can be displayed only when all CPU module serial No of first 5 digits is 07032 or later 3 Double clicking the power supply module area of mounting status can also display the detailed screen of power supply module Figure 6 93 Detailed screen of power supply module Table6 40 Description for detailed screen of power supply module Item...

Страница 460: ...able is faulty 11 Other system status Indicates the status of the other system During normal operation When an error has occurred When the Redundant CPU is in the debug mode however it indicates a normal operation status even if an error has occurred in the other system Error occurrence is not displayed Remark Refer to the following manual for details of the system monitor of GX Developer GX Devel...

Страница 461: ...splay The CPU module has an LED to indicate the CPU module operation status on the front of the CPU module 1 2 3 4 Remark Refer to the following manual for details of the LED indications QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Figure 6 96 LED on CPU module front 1 Basic model QCPU Q00JCPU 2 Basic model QCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU 3 4 Redundant CPU MODE RUN ERR USER BAT BOOT BACKUP SYS...

Страница 462: ...bit in the SD202 is turned off SD202 This specifies the LED to turn off The setting to turn off each LED is as follows All in hexadecimal When turning off both Boot LED and USER LED SD202 110H When turning off only the BOOT LED SD202 100H When turning off only the USER LED SD202 10H 2 Method to not turn on the ERR LED USER LED and BAT LED It is possible to set the error message display priority fo...

Страница 463: ... and bit configurations related to priority setting Universal UD Note6 68 The Universal model QCPU does not support the LED display priority setting Only the LED display status can be set Note6 68 Universal UD 15 to 12 11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0 bit SD207 SD208 SD209 SD207 SD208 SD209 Default value of factor number 15 to 0 bit 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process...

Страница 464: ... 1 Hexadecimal Displayed error message Remarks 1 1 AC DC DOWN Power shutoff SINGLE PS DOWN 2 Redundant base unit power supply voltage drop SINGLE PS ERROR 2 Redundant power supply module fault 2 2 UNIT VERIFY ERR FUSE BREAK OFF SP UNIT ERROR SP UNIT DOWN Module verification error Fuse shutoff Intelligent function module verify error 3 3 OPERATION ERROR SFCP OPE ERROR SFCP EXE ERROR Calculation err...

Страница 465: ...9 to 0 Example To leave the ERR LED off when a fuse shutoff error is detected set the factor No setting area to 0 where the error No is 2 Because the factor No 2 is not set the ERR LED remains off even if the fuse shutoff is detected In this case even if another error with the factor No 2 I O module verify error or intelligent function module verify error is detected the ERR LED remains off 2 If 0...

Страница 466: ...asic Process Redundant UD Universal Note6 69 Note6 69 Note6 69 Note6 69 High Performance Note6 70 The Basic model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU do not support the high speed interrupt function Basic Process Redundant Note6 69 Note6 69 Note6 69 Note6 69 UD Universal The Q02CPU does not support the high speed interrupt function When using the high speed interrupt function w...

Страница 467: ...rams If any of the interrupt and fixed scan execution type programs is executed interrupt cannot be made at the cycle intervals set for the high speed interrupt function Refer to Section 6 22 4 for other restrictions Table6 43 CPU modules compatible with high speed interrupt function Compatible CPU modules Remarks Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU There are restrictions on CPU module versions Append...

Страница 468: ...high speed interrupt s start from interrupt disable b When high speed interrupt is ignored If the interrupt disable period continues longer than the set interrupt cycle interval high speed interrupt may be ignored High speed interrupt is ignored once when it occurs twice during interrupt disable Note73 Note74 Figure 6 101 High speed interrupt setting Basic Process Redundant UD Universal Note6 71 N...

Страница 469: ...net ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module c High speed interrupt program execution This function is executed when the following conditions are all satisfied When the EI instruction is being executed When the CPU module is in the RUN status When I49 is not masked by the IMASK instruction By default I49 is not masked by the IMASK instruction Remark Refer to the followi...

Страница 470: ...h speed I O refresh setting and High speed buffer transfer setting a High speed I O refresh setting Note75 Note76 Figure 6 102 High speed interrupt setting screen Basic Process Redundant UD Universal Note6 73 Note6 73 Note6 73 Note6 73 High Performance Note6 74 The Basic model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU do not support the high speed I O refresh and high speed buffer tr...

Страница 471: ...dress can be specified POINT It is recommended to mount the target modules of this function on the main base unit Access time to modules mounting on the main base unit is shorter than that on the extension base unit Figure 6 103 High speed buffer transfer setting screen Table6 46 High speed I O refresh setting and high speed buffer transfer setting Item Sub Item Contents Restrictions Number of Set...

Страница 472: ...n the following conditions are all satisfied When the EI instruction is being executed When the CPU module is in the RUN status When I49 is not masked by the IMASK instruction By default I49 is not masked by the IMASK instruction Remark Refer to the following manual for the IMASK instruction and EI instruction QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions ...

Страница 473: ...rom start to end of high speed interrupt function Basic Process Redundant UD Universal Note6 75 Note6 75 Note6 75 Note6 75 High Performance Note6 76 The Basic model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU do not support the high speed interrupt function Basic Process Redundant UD Universal Note6 75 Note6 75 Note6 75 Note6 75 The Q02CPU does not support the high speed interrupt func...

Страница 474: ...on base unit 16 words or less Time 1 07 total number of transferred words 2 85 number of settings 0 95 More than 16 words Time 1 1 total number of transferred words 0 95 Calculation example 4 74 s when the module is mounted on the main base unit thenumber of settings is 1 and the number of words is 2 I49 overhead 41 s High speed interrupt program execution Depends on the user created interrupt pro...

Страница 475: ...ailable Parameter error is detected 3 Multiple CPU system Multiple CPU system is not available Checked at parameter setting of GX Developer 4 Instruction PR PRC UDCNT1 2 PLSY PWM SPD PLOADP PUNLOADP PSWAPP instructions are not available Any of the instructions indicated on the left is not available and error is detected 5 Instruction Instruction that will take longer processing time than high spee...

Страница 476: ... CPU module e g QJ71C24 or QJ71E71 is not available Since interrupt is disabled at the time of CPU access command issue a high speed interrupt start is delayed during that period and high speed interrupt is not available at preset cycle N points read write 0 07 N 34 s N points random read write 0 07 N 101 s 14 Monitor via other station Monitor via CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H QJ71C24 ...

Страница 477: ...d buffer transfer does not result in an error and does not transfer data to outside the range The contents of the other devices are not corrupted c Precautions for program creation As in the other interrupt programs there are the following items as precautions for program creation Section 3 1 3 7 Table6 50 Items that hold high speed interrupt by interrupt disable No Item Precaution 1 Instruction I...

Страница 478: ...ule it is necessary to designate the Intelligent function module setting Interrupt pointer setting at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box You should also designate System setting at the intelligent function module Refer to the following manual when executing an interrupt program by the interrupt of the intelligent function module Manual of the intelligent function module Rema...

Страница 479: ...uipment to the CPU module in accordance with the communication procedure of the Q series PLC such as serial communication modules Ethernet modules Refer to the following manual for the MC protocol Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual POINT 1 The CPU that can make communication with a personal computer display device or the like using the serial communication function is o...

Страница 480: ...nction Item Default Setting Range Communication system Full duplex communication Synchronization system Asynchronous system Transmission speed 1 19 2kbps 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps 57 6kbps 115 2kbps Data format Start bit 1 Data bit 8 Parity bit Odd Stop bit 1 MC protocol format 2 Automatic judgment Format 4 ASCII Format 5 binary Frame 2 QnA compatible 3C frame QnA compatible 4C frame Transmission ...

Страница 481: ... display device or the like QC30R2 cable length 3m FMBKAZ1 KURAMO ELECTRIC manufactured Cable with a mini DIN connector on one side and without connector on the other side indicates the cable length which can be specified up to 15ms in 0 1m increments Table6 53 RS 232 connector specifications Appearance Pin No Signal Symbol Signal Name 1 RD RXD Receive data 2 SD TXD Send data 3 SG Signal ground 4 ...

Страница 482: ...8 points in words 0401 00 0 Reads bit devices by 16 points 480 words 7680 points Reads word devices by 1 point 480 points Batch write 1 in bits 1401 00 1 Writes to bit devices by 1 point ASCII 3584 points BIN 7168 points in words 1401 00 0 Writes to bit devices by 16 points 4480 words 7680 points Writes to word devices by 1 point 480 words Random read in words 0403 00 0 Reads bit devices by 16 poi...

Страница 483: ...ction output FY 2 000000 to 00000F Hexadecimal Function register FD 000000 to 000004 Decimal Special relay SM 000000 to 001023 Decimal Special register SD 000000 to 001023 Decimal Internal user device Input X 000000 to 0007FF Hexadecimal Output Y 000000 to 0007FF Hexadecimal Internal relay M 000000 to 008191 Decimal Latch relay L 000000 to 002047 Decimal Annunciator F 000000 to 001023 Decimal Edge...

Страница 484: ...onal computer Display device or the like using the serial communication function However the personal computer Display device or the like that was making communication using the serial communication function results in a communication error Refer to the manual of the used device for the way to start the personal computer Display device or the like when the CPU module is reconnected with the person...

Страница 485: ...istration error The QnA compatible 3C 4C frame was not used for monitor registration Perform monitor registration again 7E40H Command error The command or sub command specified does not exist Check and correct the sent message of the device on the other end and restart communication 7E41H Data length error The number of points specified for random write read exceeds the number of points enabled fo...

Страница 486: ...ce on the other end 7F67H Overrun error The next data was received before the CPU module completed receive processing Reduce the communication speed and restart communication Check the CPU module for occurrence of an instantaneous power failure For the CPU module use the special register SD53 to check When an instantaneous power failure has occurred remove its cause 7F69H Parity error The parity b...

Страница 487: ...the following special relay and special registers shown in Table6 57 and Table6 58 Note84 Table6 57 Special relay Number Name Description SM551 Module service interval time read Turning this relay from OFF to ON reads to SD551 and SD552 the module service interval time of the intelligent function module specified in the special register SD550 ON Read OFF No processing Table6 58 Special registers N...

Страница 488: ...cess interval in cyclic communication from the network module is not stored 2 To read the service interval time when access is made from GX Developer of the other station on the network set the I O number of the network module Figure 6 109 Module service interval reading program example Sets I O number 160 hexadecimal to SD550 Starts module service interval time read Stores module service interval...

Страница 489: ...processing This enables to configure the service processing environment optimum for the system POINT Service processing designates the communication service processing with peripheral devices such as GX Developer and intelligent function modules However link refresh processing such as MELSECNET H network module or CC Link network module is not included Using the COM instruction enables to perform ...

Страница 490: ...ocess as the scan time proceeds Specifies the percentage of service processing for one scan Range 1 to 99 Unit 1 Default at selection 10 Specify service process time Specifies the time of service processing for one scan Range 0 2ms to 1000ms Unit 0 1ms Default at selection 0 2ms Specify service process execution counts Specifies the count of service processing for one scan Range 1 to 10 times Unit...

Страница 491: ...cluding the wait time of the constant scan from the scan time not a calculation of the percentage toward the scan time Example When setting Percentage of scan time 50 POINT When setting the constant scan select Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting to execute the service processing efficiently Section 6 25 2 3 d Figure 6 111 Parameter setting screen Figure 6 112 Operation at the time ...

Страница 492: ...ing speeds up by the request processing time CPU module does not wait for requests Figure 6 113 Operation when 1 time is set Figure 6 114 Operation when 2 times is set Program execution END processing 1st scan Request 1 Program execution END processing 2nd scan Request 2 Program execution END processing 3rd scan Request 3 Regardless of request data size one request is processed at a single END pro...

Страница 493: ...GX Developer Program execution END processing 3rd scan Request 1 Request 2 Request 2 0 5ms When the time required for processing one request exceeds the specified service processing time 0 5ms the service processing is suspended and the request is processed continuously at END processing of next scan The scan time increases equally Request 3 Request 5 Request 4 Request 2 Request 1 Program executio...

Страница 494: ...service processing 0 2ms is performed Therefore when the wait time is less than 0 2ms the constant scan time may be exceeded Figure 6 117 Operation when Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting is selected Program execution Waiting time END processing Program execution END processing Constant scan GX Developer Request 1 Request 2 Request 3 Request 4 Waiting time Constant scan The service...

Страница 495: ...p Writing reading to from a file register The scan time will be prolonged when the write read size is large Buffer memory write read of the intelligent function module The scan time increases when the size of write read data is large Access to network module a Diagnostics function Network diagnostics Ethernet diagnostics CC Link diagnostics b Monitor function Module access device Link direct devic...

Страница 496: ...am initial program Note86 Note87 Figure 6 118 Data setting by initial program Basic Note6 84 When using the device initial value on the Basic model QCPU check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 1 Basic Note6 84 Basic Process Redundant Note6 85 Note6 85 Note6 85 Universal UD Note6 85 The Basic model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU do not support the A...

Страница 497: ... RUN status 4 Available devices 1 Device initial values can be used by the following devices 1 Refer to Section 10 1 for the available ranges 2 The extended data register D is also included 3 The extended link register W is also included Figure 6 119 Sequence up to device initial value write Timer present value T Link special register SW Retentive timer present value ST File register R Counter pre...

Страница 498: ...al value range The number of points that can be set is up to 8000 points per range setting Add the device memory data on the project data list of GX Developer As the device memory screen appears set the device initial value data in the device initial value range set above POINT When the setting on the Device initialization range setting screen is modified be sure to execute the Device memory regis...

Страница 499: ... tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box designate the name of the file where the device initial value data is to be stored 1 For Basic model QCPU Set Device initial values to Use in the PLC file setting of the PLC parameter dialog box 2 For High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU Set the file name that stores the used device initial value data in the PLC file...

Страница 500: ...t power supply OFF ON and are changed by a program use the MOV instruction or similar one in the main routine program so that the initial values will be set to the specified devices only Use the TO instruction to write data to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module c Devices that require module synchronization setting When specifying the following devices in the device initial value ...

Страница 501: ... when turning OFF power supply or canceling reset Note89 Table6 60 Parameter item list Data held in the battery Initializing contents Error history The number of error histories is initialized to zero Latch device L Cleared to zero Device in the latch range Cleared to zero Standard RAM Formatted Cleared to zero File register assigned to the standard RAM Set to Use the same file name as that of the...

Страница 502: ...I O assignment setting 2 Select the button 3 Input 0001H to the switch 3 of the CPU slot Even when inputting to other CPU slots they are ignored 3 Battery life For the battery life of CPU module when the module uses the battery life prolonging function refer to the following manual QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Figure 6 122 Switch setting screen Switch setting Input...

Страница 503: ... to RUN switching and at END processing 3 in this section If the data in the executing program memory does not match the based data the CPU determines that the data in the program memory has been modified and a stop error RAM ERROR error code 1106 occurs Note90 Table6 61 Parameter item list CPU model name Target memory Program memory Device memory Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU Fig...

Страница 504: ...the check box for Check Program memory and set the Capacity to be checked at one time in the PLC RAS 2 tab of the PLC parameter dialog box Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU can check program memory by setting Check Program memory on the both control system CPU module and standby system CPU module However on standby system CPU module which is the back up mode for the other one the program memory must be chec...

Страница 505: ...s At power OFF to ON At reset clear At STOP to RUN after Write to PLC 4 Device memory At device readProcessing time of memory check a Process CPU and Redundant CPU 1 At STOP to RUN switching When memory check is executed STOP to RUN switching delays by the processing time of memory check shown below Q12PHCPU Q12PRHCPU 434 ms Q25PHCPU Q25PRHCPU 882 ms 2 At END processing during RUN If a program mem...

Страница 506: ...ing a check capacity 4 in Q12PHCPU at one time the maximum delay time will be 124 1024 4 256 10 1240 ms 2 The maximum capacity of program memory in each CPU modules is shown below Q12PHCPU Q12PRHCPU 124k steps 124 1024 steps Q25PHCPU Q25PRHCPU 252k steps 252 1024 steps If a user setting system area is set at formatting a program memory the capacity of the program memory will decrease for the set c...

Страница 507: ...rror code 4105 occurs Note6 89 Note91 PLOADP instruction PUNLOADP instruction PSWAPP instruction c Valid condition of PLC parameter If executing the following operations after writing the PLC parameter in the CPU module the executed or non executed program memory check function will become valid Turn the PLC off to on Reset the CPU module d Target memory Only a program memory is checked with a pro...

Страница 508: ...ed up only when the Universal model QCPU whose serial number first five digits is 10042 or later is used Note92 Table6 62 List of data to be backuped Data to be backuped Description Remarks Device data Internal user device M L B F V T ST C D W Index register Z standard device register Z File register R ZR Extended data register D 1 Extended link register W 1 The data of the file register extended ...

Страница 509: ... is backuped at the time of executing latch data backup to the standard ROM Table 6 57 shows the size of storage file used for the latch data backup function to standard ROM 1 The file size of the Q02UCPU is 87138 bytes 2 Increased or decreased depending on the parameter setting 3 Only when the data of the file register extended data register D and extended link register W are backed up storage fi...

Страница 510: ... OFF ON OFF in one scan processing c In the following cases backup is not started unless start contact of the latch data backup to standard ROM is turned OFF and turned ON again Start contact of the latch data backup to the standard ROM is set to X and the power supply is turned ON from OFF without turning OFF contact or cancel the reset after executing backup by turning ON from OFF the contact St...

Страница 511: ...a and restoring data is not completed normally Data will be restored when turning ON from OFF the power supply or canceling the reset again in the next time Execute any one of the following operations to complete restoring data normally Return data at the time of parameter is backuped Delete the backup data Backup data again 6 Deleting backup data The backup data is deleted by Online Latch data ba...

Страница 512: ...is used backup data has a priority over it Therefore even when data of latch device and latch range setting is changed it is overwritten by data backuped at the time of turning ON from OFF power supply and canceling the reset 4 Devices where local device range setting is made are not backuped They are initialized cleared to 0 when turning power supply ON from OFF or canceling the reset 5 When the ...

Страница 513: ...ritten to the standard ROM can be read by any timing using the instruction 2 Execution method Device data is written to the standard ROM by the SP DEVST instruction Also the device data written to the standard ROM is read to the specified device by the S DEVLD instruction 3 Device writable to standard ROM Table6 65 shows the devices writable to the standard ROM 1 The extended data register D is al...

Страница 514: ...vice data to the standard ROM in the PLC file setting of the PLC parameter Remark For the details of the instruction refer to the following manual QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Figure 6 129 Setting screen of file for storing device data Set the file size file name is fixed to DEVSTORE ...

Страница 515: ...conventional MELSEC Q series Ethernet module QJ71E71 100 refer to Appendix 6 The following table lists the functions using built in Ethernet ports of the CPU module Figure 7 1 Connection example using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module Note1 Table7 1 List of functions Function Reference GX Developer GOT connection Section 7 2 GX Developer direct connection simple connection Section 7 3 MC proto...

Страница 516: ...auto negotiation function is used 2 The module operation is not guaranteed if any of the following connection is used Check the module operation on the user side Connections using the Internet general public line Connections using Internet connection service provided by Internet service providers and telecommunications carriers Connections using devices in which a firewall is installed Connections...

Страница 517: ...NT 1 The Built in Ethernet port QCPU can be connected directly with GX Developer using one Ethernet cable Direct connection simple connection The direct connection simple connection enables the QnUDE H CPU and GX Developer to communicate without setting IP addresses For details refer to Section 7 3 2 For setting on the GOT side refer to following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 Setting o...

Страница 518: ...MC Protocol is selected Section 7 4 b Using Ethernet direct connection or USB connection write the settings in PLC parameter to the CPU module by selecting Online Write to PLC in GX Developer After writing the parameter settings power the programmable controller OFF ON or perform the reset operation of the CPU module using the RUN STOP RESET switch so that the parameters become valid For the Ether...

Страница 519: ...igent Function Module 2 Setting on GX Developer side Setting on GX Developer side is described below a Set the items on the Transfer Setup screen in GX Developer as shown in Figure 7 5 1 Select Ethernet board for PC side I F Select the protocol to be used on the detailed setting screen as shown in Figure 7 6 Network No Station No Not used Protocol Select the protocol to be used TCP or UDP Select t...

Страница 520: ...LC module for PLC side I F Enter the IP address or the host name of the CPU module on the detailed setting screen as shown in Figure 7 7 For the host name enter the name set in Microsoft or Windows hosts files 3 Make the setting for Other station Figure 7 7 PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module screen ...

Страница 521: ...les found is displayed CPU modules connected to a cascade connected hub are also found and displayed in the list CPU modules connected via a router cannot be found CPU modules connected via wireless LAN may not be found since the Ethernet communication does not stabilize due to lost packets If CPU modules with same IP address are found in the list re examine the parameter settings of the CPU IP ad...

Страница 522: ...ter the status of some applications may change into the wait status making the application inoperable Establish connections within the number of protocols set for open settings of PLC parameter If connections are established exceeding the setting range from a personal computer the time period causing a time out error may increase In TCP connection if no ACK response message for TCP protocol device...

Страница 523: ...troller or resetting the CPU module To execute the remote STOP or remote PAUSE to a CPU module on another station using GX Developer which is connected with built in Ethernet ports of the CPU module execute the remote STOP or remote PAUSE before powering OFF the programmable controller or resetting the CPU module 4 Communication via routers MELSOFT connection allows access to CPU modules on the ne...

Страница 524: ...ple connection which connects them using only one Ethernet cable not using a hub is available The direct connection enables communication with only specifying connection target Broadcasting IP address setting is not required a Communication setting in GX Developer Set the items on the Transfer Setup screen in GX Developer as shown in Figure 7 14 Figure 7 13 Direct connection simple connection Figu...

Страница 525: ...port tab of PLC parameter in GX Developer the direct connection is not available 3 The system configuration that connects a Built in Ethernet port QCPU with an external device using a hub as shown in Figure 7 16 is not regarded as direct connection since the hub is used Do not check the Ethernet port direct connection checkbox on the detailed setting screen 4 Under the following conditions direct ...

Страница 526: ...s personal computers and display devices can communicate with only the connected CPU module using the MC protocol An access to any of the following CPU modules is not available CPU modules on another station via network Other CPU modules in a multiple CPU system 1 The MC protocol is an abbreviation for the MELSEC communication protocol The MELSEC communication protocol is a name of the communicati...

Страница 527: ...Developer as shown below a Communication data code Select a communication data code used for the MC protocol Binary code or ASCII code b Enable online change FTP MC protocol Check the checkbox to enable online change when writing data to the CPU module from the external device that communicates using the MC protocol For details on the available functions with this setting refer to 2 in this sectio...

Страница 528: ...ET PORTS OF CPU MODULE POINT When the Enable online change FTP MC protocol box is unchecked if a data write request is sent from an external device to the CPU module which is in the RUN status data will not be written to the CPU module and the module returns the NAK message ...

Страница 529: ...Description Number of processed points Status of CPU module STOP RUN Write enabled Write disabled Device memory Batch read In units of bits 0401 0001 Reads bit devices in units of one point ASCII 3584 points BIN 7168 points In units of words 0401 0000 Reads bit devices in units of 16 points 960 words 15360 points Reads word devices in units of one point 960 points Batch write In units of bits 1401...

Страница 530: ...ster W 000000 to 001FFF Hexadecimal Timer Contact TS 000000 to 002047 Decimal Coil TC Current value TN Retentive timer Contact SS 000000 to 002047 Decimal Coil SC Current value SN Counter Contact CS 000000 to 001023 Decimal Coil CC Current value CN Link special relay SB 000000 to 007FFF Hexadecimal Link special register SW 000000 to 007FFF Hexadecimal Step relay S 000000 to 008191 Decimal Direct i...

Страница 531: ...lt in Ethernet port QCPU c Access range Only connected CPU module can be accessed Accessing a CPU module not connected results in an error In a multiple CPU system other CPU modules not connected to Ethernet cannot be accessed Accessing a CPU module on another station in CC Link IE controller network MELSECNET H Ethernet or CC Link via a connected CPU module is not possible d Precautions when UDP ...

Страница 532: ... For this reason receive processing described above is required on the external device side If the recv function is used in blocking mode data may be read by executing the function once Figure 7 20 Example of the response messages receive processing on the external device side Communication processing on the external device side End Error processing Request message send processing Response message...

Страница 533: ...he command and or subcommand not supported in the QnUDE H CPU are specified Check the request data Use commands and or subcommands supported in the QnUDE H CPU 8 C05BH The QnUDE H CPU cannot read write data from to the specified device Check the device for reading writing data 9 C05CH The request data is incorrect ex specifying data in units of bits for reading writing of word devices Correct the ...

Страница 534: ...ecified time At special relay ON For details on the specified time setting refer to 2 in this section A communication time out occurs after 20 seconds When a communication time out occurs the value in SD1270 changes to 0FFFFH a Execution at programmable controller power ON or CPU module reset Time is set when the programmable controller is powered ON or the CPU module is reset b Execution at a spe...

Страница 535: ... use the time setting function set the time on the screen activated from the Built in Ethernet port tab of PLC parameter in GX Developer SNTP Select whether to use the time setting function Required SNTP server IP address Specify the SNTP server IP address Required Time zone Specify the time zone in which the time is to be synchronized Required Default is set to Japan Standard Time GMT 9 00 Execut...

Страница 536: ...me set in the CPU module as a result of the time required for communication with the server Specify the closest SNTP server possible on the network In a multiple CPU system enable the time setting function of only the Built in Ethernet port QCPU No 1 When a CPU module other than the Built in Ethernet port QCPU No 1 is enabled the clock data of the Built in Ethernet port QCPU No 1 is automatically ...

Страница 537: ...in the CPU module directly by using this FTP server function The following accesses can be performed to files in the Built in Ethernet port QCPU from an external device with a FTP client function a Reading downloading files from Built in Ethernet port QCPU A function for storing CPU module files in an external device b Writing uploading files to Built in Ethernet port QCPU A function for registeri...

Страница 538: ...arameters as shown below FTP Set to Used Log in name Set the login name for an external device to request file transfer log in Password Set the FTP password for an external device to request file transfer log in To change the password enter both the old and the new passwords for confirmation Command input monitoring timer Set the monitoring time for command input performed by the CPU module When n...

Страница 539: ... of the QnUDE H CPU ret quote password unlock Remote password ret quote password lock ret bye ret NO NO File write File read binary ret dir ret or Is ret binary ret dir ret or Is ret quote keyword set File password ret get File name ret quote keyword set File password ret delete File name ret rename Current file name New file name ret put File name ret NO YES YES YES NO YES NO NO YES NO YES YES NO...

Страница 540: ...ort is specified for a remote password check target in remote password settings the remote password needs to be unlocked using the following command quote password unlock Remote password ret At the end of the operation change the remote password to the locked status using the following command quote password lock ret POINT When the FTP communication port is specified for a remote password check ta...

Страница 541: ...anual QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 Writing files to the program memory is enabled only when the CPU module is in the STOP status 3 Write destination is the program cache memory The user should back up files using the pm write command as required 5 in this section 4 The number of files written using the File transfer function FTP is up to the number described below Th...

Страница 542: ... STOP RUN Unlocked 2 Locked 2 Write enabled 1 Write disabled 1 binary Notifies that a file is to be transferred to the FTP server without conversion bye Disconnects the FTP server connection and ends the FTP function close Disconnects the FTP server connection delete Deletes a file stored in the QnUDE H CPU dir Displays file information stored in the QnUDE H CPU get Reads a file from the QnUDE H C...

Страница 543: ...an error does not occur Table7 9 Subcommands that can be used with quote command Command Function CPU module status Remote password Remarks STOP RUN Unlocked Locked Write enabled Write disabled change Displays changes the QnUDE H CPU file attribute keyword set Sets displays clears the QnUDE H CPU file access password password lock Specifies the remote password and changes the status from unlocked ...

Страница 544: ...le transfer target file Specify the file name according to the rules for naming files using GX Developer Characters that can be used are one byte alphabets uppercase numbers and symbols Lowercase alphabets cannot be used File name 8 characters maximum one byte Extension 3 characters maximum one byte Alphabets are not case sensitive Lowercase alphabets are treated as uppercase alphabets For the ext...

Страница 545: ...als on the FTP client side a FTP server support commands binary Function Notifies that a file is to be transferred to the FTP server without conversion Neither return codes nor kanji codes are converted This command is set automatically in the Built in Ethernet port QCPU Specification format binary abbreviated format bin bye Function Disconnects the FTP server connection and ends the FTP function ...

Страница 546: ...client side using the same file name as the transfer source file name Built in Ethernet port QCPU side The transfer destination is on the current directory of which when FTP is started up and connected to the server ls Function Displays the names of files stored in the Built in Ethernet port QCPU Specification format Is Drive name Specification example When displaying the names of files stored in ...

Страница 547: ... source drive name Specify the transfer source drive name when specifying the transfer destination file path name FTP client side When the transfer destination file path name is not specified the file is saved using a file name determined by the FTP application on the FTP client side The transfer destination is on the current directory of which when FTP is started up and connected to the server Si...

Страница 548: ... path name is not specified the file is saved using a file name determined by the FTP application on the FTP client side The transfer destination is on the current directory of which when FTP is started up and connected to the server Similar function mdir mput Function Writes a file to the Built in Ethernet port QCPU To write multiple files specify the file names and extensions within the file pat...

Страница 549: ...ssible by specifying an IP address when FTP is started up put Function Writes a file to the Built in Ethernet port QCPU Specification format put Transfer source file path name Transfer destination file path name Specification example1 When writing the MAINSEQ1 QDR file to the SRAM card with the same file name put MAINSEQ1 QDR1 MAINQDR1 QDR Specification example2 When writing the MAINSEQ QDR file t...

Страница 550: ...ename Old file path name New file path name abbreviated format ren Specification example When renaming a file stored in the SRAM card rename 1 MAINSEQ1 QDR1 SEQ1OLD QDR Note The following response codes are displayed upon normal completion 350 Need more info 250 Rename successful user Function Inputs the user name and password of the connected FTP server Specification format user User name FTP pas...

Страница 551: ...ion Displays changes Built in Ethernet port QCPU file attribute Specification format1 When displaying file attribute quote change File path name One of the following is displayed as the execution result upon normal completion When the specified file is a read only file R When the specified file is a read write enabled file W Specification format2 When changing file attribute quote change File path...

Страница 552: ...is displayed as the execution result upon normal completion When setting a file password 200 Command successful When displaying a file password 200 Keyword is File password When clearing a file password 200 Command successful Specification example1 When setting the password 1234 quote keyword set 1234 Specification example2 When displaying the password currently set for FTP settings in parameter q...

Страница 553: ...56 Password Error The following is displayed when another command is requested before unlock processing of the remote password is performed 555 Password Locked Specification example When specifying the remote password 1234 quote password unlock 1234 Note The remote password is locked when logged in to the Built in Ethernet port QCPU if the FTP communication port is specified for a remote password ...

Страница 554: ...cifying Normal RUN and Do not clear device quote run Specification example2 When executing remote RUN specifying Forced RUN and Do not clear device quote run 1 Specification example3 When executing remote RUN specifying Forced RUN and Clear all devices excluding latch range quote run 1 1 Note Forced RUN mode is used to forcibly execute remote RUN to the Built in Ethernet port QCPU from other devic...

Страница 555: ...n normal completion When the Built in Ethernet port QCPU is in the RUN status RUN When the Built in Ethernet port QCPU is in the STOP status STOP When the Built in Ethernet port QCPU is in the PAUSE status PAUSE stop Function Changes the Built in Ethernet port QCPU status to STOP Executes remote STOP Specification format quote stop The following message is displayed as the execution result upon no...

Страница 556: ...uring file access using the FTP function do not perform any online operations from peripherals such as GX Developer When an online operation is performed an error may occur on the peripheral side c Communication processing When a time out error occurs during file transfer the TCP connection will be closed disconnected To restart the file transfer log in to the Built in Ethernet port QCPU once agai...

Страница 557: ...ically The name of this file is changed to the name of written file upon normal completion However if the power failure or reset of the CPU module occurs during the file write this temporary file may remain If this occurs delete the temporary file When file registers are used in the standard RAM or SRAM card change the CPU status to STOP first and then write delete files to in these drives When fi...

Страница 558: ... prevent unauthorized access Users should incorporate safety measures by themselves if security of the programmable controller system needs to be maintained against unauthorized access from external devices We cannot be held responsibility for any problems caused by unauthorized access Examples of measures against unauthorized access Install a firewall Set up a personal computer as a relay station...

Страница 559: ...ock processing for the CPU module When unlock processing is not performed an error occurs in the external device since the CPU module does not accept access b Access processing Access is enabled after the remote password unlock processing is completed normally c Access disable processing lock processing Remote password lock processing is performed from the external device to disable subsequent acc...

Страница 560: ...ure 7 29 Screens for setting remote password Table7 10 Setting items on the screens for setting remote password Item Description Setting range Password settings Enter the remote password to be set in the QCPU 1 Up to four one byte characters Password active module settings Model name Select the CPU model to enable the remote password for built in Ethernet ports of the QCPU module Only one CPU mode...

Страница 561: ...anual 3 Using file transfer FTP server function Use the password lock unlock commands Section 7 6 5 3 Precautions for remote password Precautions for the remote password check function are described below a Setting remote password to UDP connections Determine the communication target external device and do not communicate with unspecified external devices The communication target external device n...

Страница 562: ... checked on the Remote password detail settings screen in GX Developer an error may occur due to entry errors accumulated in a long period of time by the user To prevent such errors perform the following operations Check the checkbox of Clear mismatch count when remote password matches on the Remote password detail settings screen in GX Developer Clear the accumulated count of remote password mism...

Страница 563: ...nt reaches the upper limit during unlock processing 2 Disable the communication by making the corresponding connection invalid The corresponding connection can be set to invalid by the operation described below By selecting the target connection on the Status of each connection tab which is displayed by clicking the Built in Ethernet port diagnostics button on the PLC diagnostics screen in GX Deve...

Страница 564: ...peed pulses which cannot be processed with I O modules For example an analog value is converted into a digital value with the analog digital conversion module one of the intelligent function modules before being used 2 Communication with intelligent function modules The intelligent function module is equipped with memory buffer memory to store the data received from or output to external devices T...

Страница 565: ... A series compatible special function modules 2 Represents the program using the intelligent function module device the FROM TO instruction or the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 3 Indicates the case where the RUN STOP switch RUN STOP RESET switch of the Basic model QCPU Universal model QCPU is set from STOP to RUN RUN LED flickers to STOP to RUN POINT 1 The data used for c...

Страница 566: ...n with the intelligent function modules 1 Starting GX Configurator To start GX Configurator choose Tools Intelligent function module utility Start on GX Developer 2 Setting using the GX Configurator This section describes the example to set the initial setting and automatic refresh setting of A D conversion module Q64AD a Initial setting The initial setting of Q64AD offers the following four setti...

Страница 567: ... 7 Communication using built in Ethernet ports of CPU module 8 Communication with Intelligent Function Module b Auto refresh setting For the auto refresh setting designate the device at the CPU module to store the following data Digital output of Q64AD Maximum minimum values of Q64AD Error code The auto refresh setting of Q64AD is designated on the following auto refresh setting screen of GX Confi...

Страница 568: ...rresponding special function module does not support the settings made by GX Configurator Remark For the details of GX Configurator refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used Table8 2 Number of parameter settings that can be set by GX Configurator CPU module Number of parameter settings Initial setting Auto refresh setting Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU...

Страница 569: ...d OFF and then ON or the CPU module is reset or switched from STOP to RUN 2 Designation of the device initial value Make the following setting using GX Developer Set to the device memory the intelligent function module data to be used as the device initial values Section 10 5 In the device initial value setting specify the range of the intelligent function module device to be used as the device in...

Страница 570: ... of the intelligent function module whose I O numbers are X Y20 to X Y2F 2 Difference from the FROM TO instruction The intelligent function module device can be handled as a device of the CPU module enabling the processing of data read from the intelligent function module with one instruction For example the following programming will be processed as the same as when reading and adding data from t...

Страница 571: ... Intelligent Function Module POINT The intelligent function module device accesses the intelligent function module every time the instruction is executed When writing reading buffer memory data using multiple intelligent function module devices in a sequence program make sure to write read the data in one position of the program using the FROM TO instruction When writing using multiple intelligent...

Страница 572: ... the no procedure protocol without being conscious of the buffer memory address of the serial communication module Transmission by OUTPUT instruction 2 Processing of intelligent function module dedicated instruction Some intelligent function module dedicated instructions allow the completion device to be specified This completion device turns ON in one scan when the execution of the instruction is...

Страница 573: ...dedicated for intelligent function modules are executed and the CPU module is switched from RUN to STOP before the completion device turns ON the completion device turns ON one scan later when the CPU module is switched to RUN next time b Available range The intelligent function module dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the intelligent function modules mounted on the remote I O stations...

Страница 574: ...the effects of quicker access to the special function module To use the AnS A compatible special function module adjust the execution time with SM415 2n ms clock and SD415 2n ms clock setting The initial value of SD415 is 30 When SD415 is used for interlock of the FROM TO instruction the FROM TO instruction is executed at every 120 ms POINT To change the clock value of SM415 store the new value in...

Страница 575: ...Ethernet serial communication and modem interface modules is used 2 Parameter setting method Set the PLC parameters redundant parameters network parameters and remote password parameters by GX Developer Refer to the following manual for the setting operation on GX Developer GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual POINT In GX Developer since the functions are not available to the CPU module being u...

Страница 576: ... comment of the used CPU module Setting the label and comment in the PLC name does not affect the actual operation Figure 9 1 PLC name Table9 1 PLC name list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Label 0000H Set the label name application of the CPU module Max 10 characters No setting Comment 0001H Set the comment of the CPU module label Max 64 characters No setting ...

Страница 577: ...act or RUN contact and PAUSE contact can be set X0 to 7FF No setting Section 6 6 1 PAUSE X Section 6 6 2 Remote reset 1002H Set enable disable of remote reset operation from GX Developer Enable Disable Disable Section 6 6 3 Output mode at STOP to Run 1003H Set the output Y status when the STOP status is switched to the RUN status Provide output Y status before STOP Clear output Y output one scan l...

Страница 578: ...s I28 to 31 2ms to 1000ms 1ms unit I28 100ms I29 40ms I30 20ms I31 10ms Section 10 11 Interrupt program fixed scan program setting 1 1008H Set whether an interrupt program is executed at high speed or not Execute at high speed Do not execute at high speed Do not execute at high speed Section 3 1 3 Module synchronization 100CH Set whether a CPU module startup is synchronized with an intelligent fun...

Страница 579: ...WDT watchdog timer setting WDT setting 3000H Set the watchdog timer value of the CPU module 10ms to 2000ms 10ms unit 200ms Section 3 2 Operating mode when there is an error Computation error 3002H Set the operation mode of the CPU module at error detection 2 Stop Continue Stop Section 6 17 Extended instruction error 1 Fuse blown I O module comparison error Intelligent module program execution erro...

Страница 580: ... fixed Can be set within the range of total 16 4k words including the above number of points 1 5k words 1 device Max 32k points There is no restriction on the total number of bit device points X 2k points Y 2k points M 8k points L 2k points B 2k points F 1k points SB 1k points V 1k points S 2k points T 512 points ST 0k points C 512 points D 11136points W 2k points SW 1k points Section 10 1 Section...

Страница 581: ... CPU Module Appendices Index 6 Boot file Set whether a boot from the standard ROM will be executed or not Figure 9 6 Boot file Table9 6 Boot file list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Boot file Set whether a boot from the standard ROM will be executed or not Do not execute boot Execute boot Do not execute boot Section 5 1 5 ...

Страница 582: ... 9 7 SFC Table9 7 SFC list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference SFC program start mode 8002H Set the SFC program start mode start condition and block stop time output mode when an SFC program is used QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC Initial start Start condition 8003H Autostart Block 0 Output mode when the block is stopped 8006H Turn OFF ...

Страница 583: ...ted module CPU No 2 to No 3 No n empty Set CPU Empty on the slot not mounted with the CPU module Empty input high speed input output intelli hybrid I O interrupt No setting Section 4 7 Model name Set the model name of the mounted module User memo Not used for the CPU module 16 characters No setting points Set the number of points of each slot Q00JCPU 0 points 16 points 32 points 48 points 64 point...

Страница 584: ...o setting Switch setting 0407H Set various switches of the intelligent function module Refer to the manual of the used intelligent function module No setting Section 6 10 Detail setting Error time output mode 0403H Set whether the output will be cleared or held when the control CPU results in a stop error Clear Hold Clear Section 6 8 Hardware error time PLC operation mode 4004H Set whether the con...

Страница 585: ...se Use serial communication function Do not use serial communication function Section 6 24 Transmission speed Set the transmission speed for data communication with the external device 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps 57 6kbps 115 2kbps 19 2kbps Sum check Set whether or not a sum check code is added to the transmission message and receive message according to the external device specifications when data ...

Страница 586: ...O assignment Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting and CC Link setting Figure 9 10 X Y assignment Table9 10 X Y assignment list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference X Y assignment The data set in the I O assignment Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting and CC Link setting can be checked ...

Страница 587: ... All CPUs can read all inputs 0E04H Set whether the input status of the input module or intelligent function module controlled by the other CPU will be imported or not Do not import non group input status Import non group input status Do not import non group input status All CPUs can read all outputs Set whether the output status of the output module controlled by the other CPU will be imported or...

Страница 588: ...the label and comment of the used CPU module Setting the label and comment in the PLC name does not influence the actual operation Figure 9 12 PLC name Table9 12 PLC name list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Label 0000H Set the label name application of the CPU module Max 10 characters No setting Comment 0001H Set the comment of the CPU module label Max 64 chara...

Страница 589: ...y the PAUSE contact is not allowed The RUN contact or RUN contact and PAUSE contact can be set X0 to 1FFF No setting Section 6 6 1 PAUSE X Section 6 6 2 Remote reset 1002H Set enable disable of remote reset operation from GX Developer Enable disable Disable Section 6 6 3 Output mode at STOP to RUN 1003H Set the output Y status when the STOP status is switched to the RUN status Provide output Y sta...

Страница 590: ...ter I49 I49 0 2ms to 1 0ms 0 1ms unit No setting Section 3 1 3 Section 6 22 Y Output 1010H Buffer read 1011H Buffer write 1012H Service processing setting 3 1013H Select the service processing execution method from the followings Execute the process as the scan time proceeds Specify service process time Specify service process execution counts Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting 1 t...

Страница 591: ...e used by the program Not used Use the same file name as the program Use the following file Not used Initial Device value 1102H Set the device initial value file used by the CPU module Not used Use the same file name as the program Use the following file Not used Section 6 26 File for local device 1103H Set the local device file used by the program Not used Use the following file Not used Section ...

Страница 592: ...ontinued on next page Figure 9 15 PLC RAS Table9 15 PLC RAS list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference WDT watchdog timer setting WDT setting 3000H Set the watchdog timer value of the CPU module 10ms to 2000ms 10ms unit 200ms Section 3 2 Initial execution monitoring time Set the watchdog timer value when an initial execution type program is used 10ms to 2000ms 10ms un...

Страница 593: ...on Setting range Default value Reference Operating mode when there is an error Computation error 3002H Set the operation mode of the CPU module at error detection 4 Stop Continue Stop Section 6 17 Extended instruction error 3 Fuse blown Module compari son error Intelligent module program execution error File access error Memory card operation error External power sup ply OFF 3 Error check Carry ou...

Страница 594: ...ng expression to obtain the number of steps for the check target Figure 9 16 PLC RAS 2 Table9 16 PLC RAS 2 list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Memory check Check Program memory 3008H Set whether the user area of the program memory except the system area will be checked for data corruption or not Do not make Make program memory check Do not make program memory c...

Страница 595: ...oints X 8k points Y 8k points M 8k points L 8k points 4 B 8k points F 2k points SB 2k points V 2k points S 8k points 5 T 2k points ST 0k points C 1k points D 12k points W 8k points SW 2k points Section 10 1 Section 10 2 Latch 1 start end 4 2001H Set the latch range first device number last device number in which clear is enabled by the RESET L CLR switch 2 or remote latch clear operation Set only ...

Страница 596: ...s 10042 or later Table9 18 Device list Continued Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference File register extended setting 6 Dev point 2000H Set the number of file register ZR extended data register D and extended link register W points Number of points set for the file register ZR Assign a part of the points set for the file register to the extended data register D or the...

Страница 597: ...e usability setting with a Universal model QCPU check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 5 2 Not settable when the Universal model QCPU is used Figure 9 18 Program Table9 19 Program list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Program 7000H When writing multiple programs to the CPU module set the file names and execution types execution condition...

Страница 598: ... not clear program memory at boot Section 5 2 8 Section 5 2 9 Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM Set whether the memory card data will be automatically written to the standard ROM or not at a boot Do not perform Perform automatic all data write from memory card to standard ROM Do not perform automatic all data write from memory card to standard ROM Boot file setting Set the ty...

Страница 599: ...start condition and block stop time output mode when an SFC program is used Figure 9 20 SFC Table9 21 SFC list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference SFC program start mode 8002H Set the SFC program start mode start condition and block stop time output mode when an SFC program is used Refer to the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC Initial start Start condition ...

Страница 600: ...400H Set the type of the mounted module CPU No 2 to No 4 No n empty Set CPU Empty on the slot not mounted with the CPU module Empty input high speed input output intelli hybrid I O interrupt No setting Section 4 7 Model name Set the model name of the mounted module User memo Not used for the CPU module 16 characters No setting points Set the number of points of each slot 0 points 16 points 32 poin...

Страница 601: ...mber of slots of the main base unit or extension base unit Set the number of slots for all base units 2 3 5 8 10 12 No setting Switch setting 0407H Set various switches of the intelligent function module Refer to the manual of the used intelligent function module No setting Section 6 10 Detail setting Error time output mode 0403H Set whether the output will be cleared or held when the control CPU ...

Страница 602: ... Check the data set in the I O assignment Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting and CC Link setting Figure 9 22 X Y assignment Table9 23 X Y assignment list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference X Y assignment The data set in the I O assignment Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET setting and CC Link setting can be checked ...

Страница 603: ...ules 1 module QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System Host CPU number 1 E00CH Specify the CPU number for which the multiple CPU setting parameters are set Specify the host CPU number PLC No 1 to PLC No 4 No specification Operating mode 0E01H Set the multiple CPU system operation to be performed when any of the CPU modules No 2 to No 4 results in a stop error When the CPU No 1 results in a stop erro...

Страница 604: ...utput status Import non group output status Do not import non group output status Multiple CPU high speed communica tion area setting CPU specific send range 1 E008H Set the multiple CPU high speed transmission area size assigned for each CPU module configuring the multiple CPU system For simple setting 0 to 12k points 1k units For high speed setting 0 to 16k points 0 5k units 3k points Auto refre...

Страница 605: ...mmunication via routers Default router IP address Specify the router IP address for communication via routers IP address 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 00000001H to 0DFFFFFFEH Subnet mask pattern None 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 0C0000000H to 0FFFFFFFCH Default router IP address None 0 0 0 1 to 223 255 255 254 00000001H to 0DFFFFFFEH IP address 192 168 3 39 Subnet mask pattern None Default router IP ...

Страница 606: ...ne change FTP MC protocol Specify whether to enable online change writing device data or files while the CPU is in the RUN status in the communication using the MC protocol or the FTP function Checked Unchecked Enabled Disabled Unchecked Disabled Section 7 4 Section 7 6 Disable direct connection to MELSOFT Specify whether to disable MELSOFT direction connection Disable direct connection to emphasi...

Страница 607: ...de QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Standby system watch setting Set whether a standby system error will be watched or not Check for a standby system error Do not check for a standby system error Check for a standby system error Debug mode setting Set whether the Redundant CPU will be started in the debug mode or not Do not start in debug mode Start in debug mode Do not start in debug mode ...

Страница 608: ...king will be done or not No tracking Do tracking No tracking Device detail settings Set the tracking device when the user sets the tracking device freely Tracking block No Select the block No of the tracking device Select the block No and set the tracking device in the device range settings 1 to 64 1 Do auto forward Tracking block No 1 Auto ON SM1520 Set whether the tracking block No 1 will be aut...

Страница 609: ...trol Control station Note9 6 MELSECNET H mode Control station MELSECNET H Extended mode Control station MELSECNET 10 mode Control station 2H CC IE Control Normal station MELSECNET H mode Normal station MELSECNET H Extended mode Normal station MELSECNET 10 mode Normal station 5H MELSECNET H Remote master AH MELSECNET H Standby station BH MELSECNET H mode multiplexed remote I O network master statio...

Страница 610: ...e Default value Reference Number of modules on CC Link IE controller network A000H Sets the network parameter of the CC Link IE controller network Refer to the manual for the Q corresponding CC Link IE controller network Starting I O No ANM0H Network No Total stations Station No Group No 0AmnH Mode ANM0H Refresh parameters ANM1H Setup Common parameters ANM2H Station inherent parameters ANM3H Group...

Страница 611: ...H setting list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Number of modules on MELSECNET H 5000H Set the MELSECNET H network parameters Refer to the manual for the Q corresponding MELSECNET H Starting I O No 5NM0H Network No Total stations Group No 05mnH Mode 5NM0H Refresh parameters 5NM1H Setup Common parameters 5NM2H Station inherent parameters 5NM3H Sub master parameter...

Страница 612: ...ription Setting range Default value Reference Nunber of Ethernet 9000H Set the Ethernet network parameters Refer to the manual for the Q corresponding Ethernet Starting I O No 9N00H Network No Group No Station No Operational settings Initial settings 9N01H Open settings 9N02H Router relay parameter 9N03H Station No IP information 9N05H FTP parameters 9N06H E mail settings 9N07H News setting 9N08H ...

Страница 613: ...ued on next page Figure 9 30 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Table9 34 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Item Parameter No Description Setting range Default value Reference Number of CC Link C000H Set the CC Link parameters Refer to the CC Link Manual Starting I O No CNM2H Operational settings All connect count Remote input RX CNM1H Remote output RY Remote register RWr Remote...

Страница 614: ...ecial relay SB CNM1H Set the CC Link parameters Refer to the CC Link Manual Special register SW Retry count CNM2H Set the CC Link parameters Refer to the CC Link Manual Automatic reconnection station count Standby master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay information setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt settings ...

Страница 615: ...dule QJ71C24 Manuals of the serial communication module QJ71CMO Manuals of the modem interface module Password active mod ule settings Model name Select the module model name that will be checked for the remote password set to the CU module QnUDE H CPU QJ71E71 QJ71C24 CMO Start XY Set the starting address of the module checked for the remote password Basic model QCPU 0000H to 03E0H High Performanc...

Страница 616: ... 1 512 T0 to 511 Decimal Section 10 2 10 Retentive timer 1 0 ST0 to 511 Decimal Counter 1 512 C0 to 511 Decimal Section 10 2 11 Data register 11136 D0 to 11135 Decimal Section 10 2 12 Link register 2048 W0 to 7FF Hexadecimal Section 10 2 13 Link special register 1024 SW0 to 3FF Hexadecimal Section 10 2 14 Internal system devices Bit devices Function input 16 FX0 to F Hexadecimal Unchangeable Secti...

Страница 617: ... Class Type Device Name Default Values Parameter Designated Setting Range Reference Section Number of Points Range Used File register Word device File register Q00JCPU 0 Unchangeable Section 10 7 Q00CPU Q01CPU 64k R0 to 32767 ZR0 to 65535 Decimal Nesting Nesting 15 N0 to 14 Decimal Unchangeable Section 10 9 Pointers Pointer 300 P0 to 299 Decimal Unchangeable Section 10 10 Interrupt pointer 128 I0 ...

Страница 618: ...nter 1 1024 C0 to 1023 Decimal Section 10 2 11 Data register 12288 D0 to 12287 Decimal Section 10 2 12 Link register 8192 W0 to 1FFF Hexadecimal Section 10 2 13 Link special register 2048 SW0 to 7FF Hexadecimal Section 10 2 14 Internal system devices Bit devices Function input 5 FX0 to F Hexadecimal Unchangeable Section 10 3 1 Function output 5 FY0 to F Hexadecimal Section 10 3 1 Special relay 204...

Страница 619: ...8 Nesting Nesting 15 N0 to 14 Decimal Unchangeable Section 10 9 Pointers Pointer 4096 P0 to 4095 Decimal Unchangeable Section 10 10 Interrupt pointer 256 I0 to 255 Decimal Section 10 11 Other Bit devices SFC block device 320 BL0 to 319 Decimal Unchangeable Section 10 12 1 SFC transition device 9 512 TR0 to 511 Decimal Section 10 12 2 Network No specification device 255 J1 to 255 Decimal Section 10...

Страница 620: ...CPU system is configured 5 The points in the parentheses are points when using the Universal model QCPU 6 The points in the parentheses are available when the Universal model QCPU is used 7 The double precision floating point data can only be used for the Universal model QCPU 8 Up to 15 digits can be input by GX Developer 9 The Universal model QCPU cannot use the SFC transition switch 10 Device po...

Страница 621: ...etting of the PLC parameter dialog box Table10 3 The following gives more information Figure 10 1 Device in PLC parameter dialog box Note2 Note3 Table10 3 Internal user device setting range CPU module Changeable range Basic model QCPU 16 4k words Including 1 5k words for the above devices High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU 29k words Including 3 7k words for ...

Страница 622: ...ing device points If the device points are set exceeding the corresponding device range the data may be written into other devices or an error may occur 2 The total number of points for internal relays latch relays annunciators edge relays link relays link special relays step relays timers retentive timers and counters can be set within the following range Table10 4 The total number of points for ...

Страница 623: ...evices 16 points are calculated as 1 word b For timer T retentive timer ST and Counter C For the timer retentive timer and counter 16 points are calculated as 18 words c For word devices As for data register D link register W and link special register SW 16 points is calculated as 16 words POINT When an internal user device s number of usable points setting is changed the following files which wer...

Страница 624: ...000 to 1FFF 16 512 words 1 8192 points Internal relay M 10 16k 16384 points M0 to 16383 16 1024 words 1 16384 points Latch relay L 10 4k 4096 points L0 to 4095 16 256 words 1 4096 points Link relay B 16 4k 4096 points B0000 to 0FFF 16 256 words 1 4096 points Annunciator F 10 1k 1024 points F0 to 1023 16 64 words 1 1024 points Link special relay SB 16 2k 2048 points SB0000 to 07FF 16 128 words 1 20...

Страница 625: ...ual relay inside the High Performance model QCPU the program uses the Xn s N O contact or N C contact 3 Number of used N O and N C contacts There are no restrictions on the number of Xn N O contacts and N C contacts used in a program provided the program capacity is not exceeded Figure 10 2 Commands from external devices to CPU module Figure 10 3 Inputs X Figure 10 4 Input X Used in Program 1 2 3 ...

Страница 626: ...described below GX Developer test operation OUT Xn instruction 2 The input X can also be used in the following cases Refresh target CPU module side device of RX of CC Link Refresh target CPU module side device of the CC Link IE controller network or MELSECNET H Figure 10 5 Input X ON OFF by the OUT Xn instruction X1 OUTX1 ON OFF command ...

Страница 627: ...s on the number of output Yn N O contacts and N C contacts used in a program provided the program capacity is not exceeded 3 Using outputs as internal relays M Output Y corresponding to the slots installed with input modules and empty slots can serve as internal relays M Figure 10 6 Output from CPU module to external devices Figure 10 7 Use of output Y in program Figure 10 8 Substitute for interna...

Страница 628: ...or Redundant CPU When the start mode is set to the hot start mode the internal relays are latched backed up for power failure When the start mode is set to the initial start mode the internal relays are not latched backed up for power failure 3 Number of used N O and N C contacts There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program provided the program ...

Страница 629: ...ion 11 CPU Module Processing Time 12 Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index 4 Procedure for external outputs Outputs Y are used to output sequence program operation results to an external destination POINT Latch relays L should be used when a latch memory backup is required Section 10 2 4 ...

Страница 630: ...4 Note4 3 Number of used N O and N C contacts There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program provided the program capacity is not exceeded POINT For the Universal model QCPU the scan time is prolonged when the latch relay L is used Reducing the number of latch relay L points can reduce the prolonging scan time Section 10 1 2 11 Note4 Figure 10 10 ...

Страница 631: ...ule Appendices Index 4 Procedure for external outputs Outputs Y are used to output sequence program operation results to an external destination POINT 1 Internal relays M should be used when a latch memory backup is not required Section 10 2 3 2 For latch clear the latch clear disabled range can be set to each device in the device setting of the PLC parameter dialog box Section 6 3 ...

Страница 632: ...nce annunciator number can be checked by monitoring the special register SD62 to 79 when the special relay SM62 switches ON 4 Number of used N O and N C contacts There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts NC contacts used in the program provided the program capacity is not exceeded Special relay SM62 Switches ON if even one annunciator switches ON Special register SD62 No of ...

Страница 633: ...r time than the SET F instruction since it performs processing every scan If the annunciator is turned OFF by the OUT F instruction the RST F instruction LEDR instruction Note10 5 BKRST instruction must be executed For these reasons use the SET F instruction to turn ON the annunciator Note5 POINT 1 If switched ON by any method other than the SET F and OUT F instructions the annunciator functions i...

Страница 634: ...n the module front turns ON When High Performance model QCPU Process CPU or Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU is used The USER LED red on the module front turns ON 3 Selection of LED ON OFF Setting LED indication priority to SD207 to SD209 when an error occurs enables to select to turn ON or OFF USER LED when an annunciator is turned ON For the Basic model QCPU ERR LED Figure 10 12 Processing at ...

Страница 635: ... 4 OUT F instruction The OUT F instruction can execute ON OFF of the annunciator No by the same instruction However if an annunciator is switched OFF by the OUT F instruction the processing at annunciator OFF 6 b in this section is not performed Execute the RST F LEDR or BKRST instructions after the annunciator has been switched OFF by the OUT F instruction Remark Refer to the following manual for...

Страница 636: ...SD65 and later are shifted up The annunciator No stored in SD64 is stored into SD62 1 is subtracted from the SD63 value If the SD63 value is 0 SM62 is switched OFF Note7 Figure 10 14 Processing at annunciator OFF when LEDR instruction is executed Basic Note10 7 The Basic model QCPU cannot use the LEDR instruction Basic Note10 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SD62 SD63 SD64 SD65 SD66 SD67 SD79 50 1 50 0 0 0 0 50 2 ...

Страница 637: ...FF the LED refer to 5 b in this section which was turned ON as the annunciator turned ON turns OFF POINT If the LEDR instruction is executed when annunciator ON and the operation con tinuation error having higher priority Section 6 21 2 than the annunciator occur simultaneously the LEDR instruction clears the error having higher priority Section 6 21 2 than the annunciator Hence the annunciator ca...

Страница 638: ...ple the X0 ON OFF information is stored at V0 and the X1 ON OFF information is stored at V1 3 Precautions The edge relay of the same No cannot be set in multiple steps of a program Figure 10 16 Edge relay Figure 10 17 Application example and timing chart of edge relay X0 X1 X10 V1 Edge relay Stores the X0 X1 and X10 operation results SM400 SM400 MOV K0 Z1 FOR K10 M0Z1 INC Z1 NEXT Index register Z1...

Страница 639: ...LB of the MELECNET H network module etc 2 Number of used N O and N C contacts There are no restrictions on the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program Figure 10 18 Link refresh Figure 10 19 Link Relay Link relay Link relay B0 LB0 CPU module MELSECNET H network module Link refresh setting range Link refresh X0 B0 T0 Y20 X1 B0 B100 X2 B0 B1FFF SET B0 K20 No restrictions on t...

Страница 640: ...n the CPU module is 2048 points Basic model QCPU or 8192 points High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU Although the number of device points for link relays in the MELSECNET H network module is 16384 points the default number of points for link relays in the CPU module is 2048 points Basic model QCPU or 8192 points High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redu...

Страница 641: ...nts The number of link special relay points is as described in Table10 6 Table10 6 Number of link special relay points of each CPU module CPU module Number of link special relay points Basic model QCPU 1024 points SB0 to 3FF 512 points assigned for the intelligent function module having link special relays such as CC Link IE controller network module and MELSECNET H network module High Performance...

Страница 642: ...tting of the PLC parameter dialog box Section 10 1 2 For the intelligent function module such as the CC Link IE controller network module and MELSECNET H network module having link special relays 512 points are assigned Assigning the link special relay as shown below enables refreshing of the CC Link link special relay SB for the link special relay SB of the CPU module SB200 SB3FF SB400 SB5FF SB60...

Страница 643: ...ndex 10 2 9 Step relay S Step relays are devices for SFC programs Refer to the following manual for how to use the step relays QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC POINT Because the step relay is a device exclusively for the SFC program it cannot be used as an internal relay in the sequence program If used in this manner a SFC error will occur and system operation will be stopped system down ...

Страница 644: ... With a timer setting instruction format a device is assigned for a low speed retentive timer or high speed retentive timer The OUT T0 instruction is used to assign a device for a low speed retentive timer The OUTH T0 instruction is used to assign a device for a high speed retentive timer 4 Low speed timers a Definition Low speed timers perform counting in 1 to 1000ms units The timer is valid only...

Страница 645: ...ts coil is ON and has a symbol H The time measurement begins when the timer s coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when the time elapses When the timer s coil switches OFF the current value becomes 0 and the contact switches OFF b Measurement units Measurement units are set in the PLC system tab of the PLC parameter dialog box Figure 10 22 Ladder example and timing chart of high speed time...

Страница 646: ...The measurement units settings for retentive timers are the same as those for low speed timers and high speed timers Low speed retentive timer Same as low speed timer High speed retentive timer Same as high speed timer POINT In order to use retentive timers a retentive timer number of points used setting must be designated at the Device tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box Figure 10 23 Ladde...

Страница 647: ...hen an OUT T instruction is executed the following is processed timer coil ON OFF current value update and contact ON OFF processing Timer current value update and contact ON OFF processing are not performed at END processing Figure 10 24 Processing at execution of OUT TO instruction X0 T0 K10 END OUT T0 END Processing at execution of OUT T0 instruction Ladder example Sequence program Processing c...

Страница 648: ...y of timer For 10ms X0 T0 H K8 2 3 2 3 2 3 OUT T0 OUT T0 OUT T0 OUT T0 OUT T0 OUT T0 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 Ladder example Current value update timing Program X0 external input CPU module s X0 T0 coil T0 contact 10ms measurement Measured value at END instruction T0 current value END processing 0 2 2 2 3 5 5 2 7 7 3 10 Timer accuracy to 1 scan time 1 scan time tim...

Страница 649: ...mer current value will not be updated c Program that cannot use timers Timers cannot be used in interrupt programs and fixed scan execution programs Note10 9 Note9 d When set value is 0 If the timer set value is 0 the contact turnes ON when the OUT T instruction is executed e When set value is changed after time out If the set value changes to a value which is higher than the current value followi...

Страница 650: ... T1 OUT T0 END processing OUT T1 OUT T0 END processing OUT T1 OUT T0 END processing OUT T1 OUT T0 END processing Contact of T0 Current value of T0 Coil of T1 Contact of T1 Current value of T1 Measures for one second when T1 turns OFF Turns ON OFF repeatedly per one second K10 T1 T1 K10 T0 T0 M0 T1 Measures for one second when T1 turns OFF Coil of T0 OUT T0 OFF OFF 0 0 0 1 One second 900ms 9 10 10 ...

Страница 651: ...er types counters which count the number of input condition start ups leading edges in sequence programs and counters which count the number of interrupt factor occurrences 3 Count processing a When OUT C instruction is executed When and OUT C instruction is executed the following counter processing occurs coil ON OFF current value update count value 1 and contact ON OFF Counter current value upda...

Страница 652: ... can be used within a single scan to achieve the maximum counting speed In such cases the direct access input DX method should be used for the counter input signals Section 3 8 2 Figure 10 29 Current value update timing Figure 10 30 Ladder example for increasing the maximum counting speed X0 C0 K10 X0 OFF OFF ON ON END END END OUT C0 OUT C0 OUT C0 Ladder example Current value update timing Sequenc...

Страница 653: ...he coil of C is turned ON at the execution of the OUT C instruction to update the current value increment the count value by 1 In the above ladder example when M0 turns from OFF to ON the coil of C0 turns ON updating the current value When C0 reaches the preset value finally the contact of C0 turns ON and the execution of the RST C0 instruction clears the current value of C0 At this time the coil ...

Страница 654: ...ated by the following expression 1 The duty is the count input signal s ON OFF time ratio expressed as a percentage value Figure 10 33 Current value update timing Figure 10 34 Counter resetting ladder example recommended example n Duty 1 T Execution interval of the OUT C instruction sec Figure 10 35 Duty ratio M0 OFF OFF ON RST C0 OUT C0 END RST C0 OFF RST C0 OUT C0 END END ON Sequence program Coi...

Страница 655: ...counter function 2 Counting of interrupt counter Interrupt counter operation requires more than the simple designation of a set value To use the interrupt counter for control purposes comparison instructions etc must also be used to enable comparisons with the set value with an internal relay M etc being switched ON or OFF according to the comparison result Figure 10 36 shows a sample program in w...

Страница 656: ...mber of interrupt counter points of each CPU module Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU 128 points starting from the set counter number are used as interrupt counters When the first interrupt counter No is set to C300 C300 to 427 are used as interrupt counters 256 points starting from the set counter number are used as interrupt counters When the first interrupt ...

Страница 657: ...nstructions During interrupt program execution During execution of a fixed scan execution type program Note10 12 Note12 c Maximum counting speed of interrupt counter The maximum counting speed of the interrupt timer is determined by the longest processing time of the items shown below Instruction with the longest processing time among the instructions used in the program Interrupt program processi...

Страница 658: ...he lower 16 bits of data are stored at the data register No Dn designated in the sequence program and the higher 16 bits of data are stored in the designated register No 1 Dn 1 For example if register D12 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in D12 and the upper 16 bits are stored in D13 Two data registers can store a range of numeric data from 2147483648 to 214748364...

Страница 659: ...iguration of link register a Bit configuration and read and write units Link registers which consist of 16 bits per point read and write data in 16 bit units POINT 1 Link register data are handled as signed data For HEX hexadecimal 0000H to FFFFH can be stored However since the most significant bit is a sign bit the range of a value that can be specified is 32768 to 32767 2 When used outside the M...

Страница 660: ...ed in the link register is initialized when the PLC is powered OFF or the CPU module is reset POINT Although the number of device points for link registers in the CC Link IE controller network module is 131072 points the default number of points for link registers in the CPU module is 2048 points Basic model QCPU or 8192 points High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal mo...

Страница 661: ...m In order to use link registers in the network system network parameter settings must be made Link registers not set in the network parameter settings can be used as data registers Remark Refer to the following manual for the network parameters CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Q Corresponding MELSECNET H ...

Страница 662: ...Table10 9 Number of link special register points of each CPU module CPU module Number of link special relay points Basic model QCPU 1024 points SW0 to 3FF 512 points assigned to each intelligent function module such as CC Link IE controller network module and MELSECNET H network module High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU 2048 points SW0 to 7FF 512 points assigned to each intellig...

Страница 663: ...F However this can be changed in the device setting of the PLC parameter dialog box Section 10 1 2 For the intelligent function module such as the CC Link IE controller network module and MELSECNET H network module having link special relays 512 points are assigned Assigning the link special registers as shown below enables refreshing of the CC Link special register SW for the link special registe...

Страница 664: ... Function input devices FX These devices are used to designate inputs of ON OFF data to a subroutine program In the subroutine program these devices are used for reading and processing bit data designated by subroutine with argument CALL instruction All the CPU module bit data designation devices can be used b Function output devices FY These devices are used to designate outputs of subroutine pro...

Страница 665: ... data is the destination data the data is designated as subroutine output data 1 function register occupies a maximum of 4 words The number of words used depends on an instruction in a subroutine program A one word instruction requires 1 word A two words instruction requires 2 words The destination of 32 bit multiplication division operation requires 4 words CPU module word data devices can be use...

Страница 666: ... function registers will not correctly be returned to a calling program Remark Refer to the following manual for how to use the function devices QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Figure 10 46 Ladder example where the devices are unusable in the sub routine program that contains arguments CALLP P0 D0 D R0 R10 FD0 P0 MOV K0 D3 Since the points D0 to 3 are used for FD0 D3 can ...

Страница 667: ... registers SM1000 SD1000 and later is selected in the PLC system setting of the PLC parameter dialog box Remark For details on special relays which can be used by the CPU module refer to Appendix 1 Table10 10 Special relay classification list Classification Special relay CPU module Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU Diagnostics information S...

Страница 668: ...m setting of the PLC parameter dialog box Remark For details on special relays refer to Appendix 2 Table10 11 Special register classification list Classification Special register CPU module Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universalmodel QCPU Diagnostics information SD0 to 99 1 SD0 to 199 2 Serial communication function SD100 to 129 1 Fuse blown module SD130 t...

Страница 669: ...h 2 Designation method and application example of link direct device a Designation method Link direct devices are designated by network No and device No b Application example For link register 10 W10 of network No 2 the designation would be J2 W10 For a bit device X Y B SB digit designation is necessary Designation example J1 K1X0 J10 K4B0 Figure 10 47 Link direct device designation method Figure ...

Страница 670: ...rameters that is outside the range specified as the refresh range in the network refresh parameters Although writing is also allowed in the refresh range portion of the link device range specified by refresh parameters the link module s link device data will be rewritten when a refresh operation occurs When writing by link direct device the same data should also be written to the CPU module relate...

Страница 671: ...ing range using a link direct device the data which is received from that station will replace the written data Figure 10 50 Write to link device set to refresh range MOV K100 W1 W0 W1 LW1 MOV K100 W1 MOV J1 W1 MOV J1 W1 W1 W1 100 is written to network module LW1 when a refresh occurs 100 is written to network module LW1 when the MOV instruction is executed Sequence program Writing timing CPU modu...

Страница 672: ...nk direct device Note10 13 Note14 In the case where the station No 1 and No 2 network modules are mounted on the network No 1 as shown in Figure 10 51 the station No 2 will be the target network module Note14 Figure 10 51 When two or more network modules are mounted on the same network Note10 13 Basic When the Basic model QCPU is used mounting two or more network modules on the same network number...

Страница 673: ...e Manual Remote I O network 3 For details on network parameters common parameters and network refresh parameters refer to the following manuals Detailed information CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network Setting procedures GX Develope...

Страница 674: ...e as shown in Figure 10 53 when storing into D0 to 3 the digital output values of CH 1 to 4 on the Q64AD analog digital converter module X Y020 to 02F mounted at the I O No 020 POINT Using the intelligent function module device allows device comments to be attached to the buffer memory GX Developer Operating Manual Figure 10 52 Intelligent function module device designation method Figure 10 53 Int...

Страница 675: ...on module device in the sequence program twice or more and writing reading data of the buffer memory writing reading data in one place of the program with the FROM TO instruction enables to speed up the processing speed Remark 1 For details on buffer memory addresses and applications refer to the intelligent function module special function module manual Note10 14 2 Refer to the following manual f...

Страница 676: ...an directly specify the information on the CPU shared memory as an argument of the instruction the devices for interlock are not required 3 Specifying method and application example of common device for multiple CPU a Specifying method The common device for multiple CPU is specified using the I O number of a CPU module and the CPU shared memory address Remark For details of the common device for m...

Страница 677: ...5 16 points Universal model QCPU Z0 to 19 20 points 2 Bit configuration of index registerNote17 a Bit configuration and write read units The index register configured in 16 bits per point writes reads data in units of 16 bits POINT Index register data are handled as signed data F or HEX hexadecimal 0000H to FFFFH can be stored However since the most significant bit is a sign bit the range of a val...

Страница 678: ...ndard device register Z 1 Definition The Universal model QCPU can perform operation at the faster speed if the index register is used between the register operations The index register used in this case is called General purpose operation resistor 2 Device number The standard device register is the same device as the index register When performing indexing pay attention not to use the same device ...

Страница 679: ... 3 Exchanges of index register dataNote18 Word devices should be used for exchanges of index register data between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs Figure 10 60 Saving and restoration of index register value at switching between scan and low speed execution type programs Note18 Redundant Basic Note10 17 Note10 17 UD Universal Note10 17 Execution program Index regi...

Страница 680: ...heck box in the Interrupt program Fixed scan program setting section at the PLC system tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box This will switch between programs quickly Note19 Figure 10 61 Interrupt program fixed scan program setting Basic model QCPU does not support the low speed execution type program and fixed scan exe cution type program Replace scan low speed execution type program with ma...

Страница 681: ...rogram 2 When switching from interrupt fixed scan execution type program to scan low speed execution type program The CPU module restores the saved index register value POINT Word devices should be used to transfer index register data from an interrupt or fixed scan execution type program to a scan or low speed execution type program Figure 10 62 Index register saving protection restoration When H...

Страница 682: ...upted Before writing data to index registers by using an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program use the ZPUSH ZPOP instruction to save restore the data Figure 10 63 Index register saving protection restoration When High speed execution is selected Figure 10 64 When data is written to index register by interrupt fixed scan execution type program Execution program Index register value I...

Страница 683: ...ter block No of the scan low speed execution type program and passes it to the interrupt fixed scan execution type program b When switching from interrupt fixed scan execution type program to scan low speed execution type program The CPU module restores the saved file register block No Figure 10 65 File register block No saving protection restoration RSET K0 Execution program Block No of file regi...

Страница 684: ... file register No Rn designated in the sequence program and the upper 16 bits of data are stored in the designated file register No 1 For example if file register R2 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in R2 and the upper 16 bits are stored in R3 Two file registers can store a range of numeric data from 2147483648 to 2147483647 or from 0H to FFFFFFFFH The most signif...

Страница 685: ...ar to clear the data 10 7 1 File register data storage location As the memory for storing the file register data there are three different memories standard RAM SRAM card and Flash card The file register data storage location changes depending on the CPU module The file register data storage location of each CPU module is as described in Table10 13 Note20 Figure 10 69 Example of clearing file regi...

Страница 686: ...be stored 32k words block For Universal model QCPU Up to 4086k points can be stored in one file Up to 128 blocks can be stored 32k words block Note that the number of points or blocks that can be expanded depends on the capacity of the program and device comment stored in a memory card Table10 14 File register capacity of each CPU module CPU module Number of points Basic model QCPU Q00JCPU File re...

Страница 687: ... Up to 1018k points can be stored in one file Up to 32 blocks can be stored 32k words block For Universal model QCPU Up to 2039k points can be stored in one file Up to 64 blocks can be stored 32k words block Note that the number of points or blocks that can be expanded depends on the capacity of the memory card to be used and the capacity of the program and device comment stored in a memory card R...

Страница 688: ...3 Table10 15 File register access method for each memory How to Access Standard RAM SRAM Card Note10 21 Flash Card Note10 21 Writing a program Reading a program PLC write to device memory PLC read to device memory How to Modify the Stored Data Online test operation from GX Developer PLC write from GX Developer PLC write from GX Developer Flash ROM Batch write from serial communication module Devic...

Страница 689: ...r registration procedure Basic Note10 22 When using the Basic model QCPU it is not necessary to register the file registers The file registers are automatically registered to the standard RAM Basic Note10 22 PLC file tab screen at PLC parameter dialog box File register setting Creating new device memory screen Use the following files is selected Writing of the file register Online Write to PLC scr...

Страница 690: ... used in the sequence program are determined at the PLC file tab screen in the PLC Parameter dialog box a Not used This setting should be selected for the following cases When not using the file registers When designating the file registers to be used in the sequence program The QDRSET instruction is used to designate which file registers are to be used Figure 10 71 File register setting a b c ...

Страница 691: ...d with the program currently being executed 2 Setting of file register points Choose Online Write to PLC on GX Developer to set the number of available file register points POINT File registers dedicated to each program may not be designated with some instructions Refer to the allowable device in the programming manual of each instruction for details Figure 10 72 File register when program is chan...

Страница 692: ...cified filename is not found on the specified drive a PARAMETER ERROR 3002 will occur When an ATA card is used a memory card ROM cannot be registered with the targeted memory File register data cannot be stored into the ATA card If a memory card is registered with the targeted memory a parameter error 3000 will occur when a file register file is written to the High Performance model QCPU 2 File Re...

Страница 693: ...me of a file register file is displayed Select the desired filename of a file register file c Specifying the capacity and filename This section is used to specify the capacity of file registers and a filename of the file register file to be written onto the CPU module QCPU side filename 1 File register capacity of CPU module The file register capacity can be set in 1 point units However note that ...

Страница 694: ...ccess format This format is used for designating file register beyond 32k points by device name Multiple blocks of file registers can be used as a continuous file register POINT The block No and number of block ZR device points that can be specified change depending on the file register storage location Section 10 7 1 or file register capacity Section 10 7 2 Figure 10 75 Block switching format Fig...

Страница 695: ...he standard RAM an undefined data is stored For the memory card 0H is stored 2 Writing reading to from a file register outside the registered capacity points For the standard RAM an undefined data is stored For the memory card 0H is stored a High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Even if data are written read to from a file register of which file is not registered for the CPU module...

Страница 696: ...ister capacity of the currently selected file register file is stored in SD647 POINT The less than 1k points surplus portion of a file register capacity is not stored In order to ensure an accurate range of use check be sure to designate the file register setting in 1k point 1024 points units 2 Checking timing A file register capacity check should be executed at step 0 of programs in which file re...

Страница 697: ...rogram example 2 The file register range of use is checked after executing the QDRSET instruction Program example 3 For block switching c File register file deletion Choose Online Delete PLC data on GX Developer to delete the unnecessary file register file Figure 10 77 File register checking program example SM400 M0 Y0 M0 Transfer command M0 MOVP K4X20 R0 SD647 K4 Designates 4k points Final file r...

Страница 698: ...time per instruction is 1 1 s for the Q02CPU and 0 65 s for the QnHCPU on average Table10 16 indicates the processing time taken when the MOV instruction is used Unit s Note25 Table10 16 Change of processing time depending on file register specifying method Instruction Q12HCPU Q02CPU 02092 or later 02091 or earlier 02092 or later 02091 or earlier MOV K0 R0 0 11 0 11 0 26 0 26 MOV K0 ZR0 3 55 2 88 ...

Страница 699: ...evice Internal user device File register file Device numbers for extended data register are sequentially assigned to those for data register Extended data register Data register Number of points set for data register Number of points set for file register The file size is the total number of points for file register extended data register D and extended link register W Number of points set for ext...

Страница 700: ...data register D inside the CPU module are not connected The same holds for the link register W and the extended link register W To use the devices as one continuous area set the number of points for the data register D or link register W to 0 on the Device tab of PLC parameter and use only the extended data register D or extended link register W 2 When using the file register ZR extended data regi...

Страница 701: ...otal number of points for the file register ZR extended data register D and extended link register W 2 The capacity indicates the maximum number of points when SRAM card 8M bytes is used 3 The capacity indicates the maximum number of points when Flash card 4M bytes is used Figure 10 79 Screen for setting the number of points for the file register Table10 17 File register setting items Item Corresp...

Страница 702: ...t areas for these devices are reserved in the file register file Figure 10 80 File register extended setting Figure 10 81 Areas for extended data register D and extended link register W The number of point set for file register on the PLC file tab is displayed Set the latch range if data needs to be latched Set the number of device points so that the total equals to the point set for file register...

Страница 703: ...annot be changed during RUN 3 The file register cannot be switched using the QDRSET instruction OPERATION ERROR error code 4100 4 Set the refresh range for the following auto refresh settings so that the range does not cross over the boundary between the internal user device and the extended data register D or extended link register W Auto refresh with network modules Auto refresh with intelligent...

Страница 704: ...er W hexadecimal WC Number of points set for the link register W Calculation example DC Number of points set for the data register D 12288 points WC Number of points set for the link register W 8192 points ZRC Number of points set for the file register ZR 2048 points EDC Number of points set for the extended data register D 2048 points Device number of the device register ZR to access D13000 EDZN ...

Страница 705: ... in ascending order in order of N0 to N14 starting from the outside of the nesting structure Refer to the following manual for how to use nesting QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Figure 10 83 Program example using nesting M15 N0 B C A M15 N0 MC M16 N1 MC N2 MCR N1 MCR M17 N2 MC N0 MCR M16 N1 M17 N2 N0 nesting control range N1 nesting control range N2 nesting control range ...

Страница 706: ...LLP to designate the CALL destination and label subroutine beginning 3 Pointer types a Basic model QCPU Since the Basic model QCPU cannot execute multiple programs it is irrelevant to the difference between local pointers and common pointers b High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU There are the following two different pointer types Local pointer Section 10 10 1...

Страница 707: ...f available pointer points changes depending on the CPU module Remark Refer to the following manual for the jump instruction and subroutine call instruction QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Table10 19 Number of available pointer points of each CPU module CPU module Number of points Basic model QCPU 300 points High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal ...

Страница 708: ...uld begin from P0 Note28 Figure 10 85 Use of the same pointer in each program Local pointer Figure 10 86 Concept of the number of local pointer points Basic Note10 26 Since the Basic model QCPU cannot execute multiple programs it is irrelevant to the difference between local pointers and common pointers When the Basic model QCPU is used it is not necessary to be conscious of the description in thi...

Страница 709: ...pointers a Program where local pointers are described Local pointers cannot be used from other program jump instructions and sub routine CALL instructions Use an ECALL instruction to call a subroutine subprogram in a program file that contains local pointers b Total number of local pointer points If the total number of pointers total for all programs exceeds 4096 points a pointer configuration err...

Страница 710: ...Figure 10 87 Calling the pointers in other programs Common pointers Basic Note10 27 Since the Basic model QCPU cannot execute multiple programs it is irrelevant to the difference between local pointers and common pointers When the Basic model QCPU is used it is not necessary to be conscious of the description in this section Basic Note10 27 Program A FEND CALL P204 Program C P204 P205 CALL P0 RET ...

Страница 711: ...een in the PLC Parameter dialog box A range of common pointers starts from a specified pointer number to P4095 However only pointer numbers subsequent to the local pointer range can be designated by parameter setting as common pointers If a total of 400 points are used in three programs 100 points in Program A 100 points in Program B and 200 points in Program C for example all local pointers after...

Страница 712: ...in several programs overlaps the first number of common pointers a pointer configuration error Error Code 4020 will occur POINT In the jump instruction jumping to common pointers in other programs is not allowed Common pointers should be used only with subroutine call instructions Figure 10 89 Concept of common pointer using range Total of 400 points used All pointers after P400 can be used as com...

Страница 713: ...nterrupt pointers can be used in all running programs 2 Number of available interrupt pointer points Table10 20 indicates the number of available interrupt pointer points Figure 10 90 Interrupt pointer Table10 20 Number of available interrupt pointer points of each CPU module CPU module Number of points Basic model QCPU 128 points I0 to 127 High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Uni...

Страница 714: ...refer to the manual for each module 9 The target module is the intelligent communication module etc For details refer to the manual for each module 10 When using the interrupt module with the High Performance model QCPU check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer Appendix 4 2 POINT To use the intelligent function module interrupt Section 6 23 the intelligent function module setting inter...

Страница 715: ... setting is required in the PLC system setting of the PLC parameter dialog box Refer to Section 6 23 for the interrupt from the intelligent function module 3 Among I50 to 127 I50 has the highest priority priority 21 and I127 has the lowest priority priority 98 Table10 22 Interrupt pointer No and interrupt factor list Basic model QCPU I No Interrupt factors Priority level I0 Interrupt module QI60 1...

Страница 716: ...R EX POWER OFF I6 7th point 226 I7 8th point 227 I8 9th point 228 I9 10th point 229 I36 ICM OPE ERROR FILE OPE ERROR I10 11th point 230 I11 12th point 231 I37 Empty I12 13th point 232 I38 PRG TIME OVER I13 14th point 233 I39 CHK instruction execution Annunciator detection I14 15th point 234 I15 16th point 235 I40 to 48 Empty I16 Special function module for starting sequence 1 1st point 208 I17 2nd...

Страница 717: ...bled from execution DI when the system is powered on the High Performance model QCPU is reset When using interrupt pointers I32 to 48 execute the IMASK instruction to enable interrupts Refer to the following manual for the IMASK instruction QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 7 Set the time out period of the internal timer by choosing PLC system System interrupt setting High ...

Страница 718: ...LTI CPU ERROR I3 4th point 211 I4 5th point 212 I5 6th point 213 I35 OPERATION ERROR SFCP OPE ERROR SFCP EXE ERROR EX POWER OFF I6 7th point 214 I7 8th point 215 I8 9th point 216 I9 10th point 217 I36 ICM OPE ERROR FILE OPE ERROR I10 11th point 218 I11 12th point 219 I37 Empty I12 13th point 220 I38 PRG TIME OVER I13 14th point 221 I39 CHK instruction execution Annunciator detection I14 15th point...

Страница 719: ...032 or later 4 When an error interrupt with I32 error that stops operation occurs the Process CPU stops after performing the processing of I32 at error occurrence 5 I32 to 48 are disabled from execution DI when the system is powered on the Process CPU is reset When using interrupt pointers I32 to 48 execute the IMASK instruction to enable interrupts Refer to the following manual for the IMASK inst...

Страница 720: ... the interrupt from the intelligent function module 5 Among I50 to 255 I50 has the highest priority priority 2 and I255 has the lowest priority priority 207 Table10 25 Interrupt pointer No and interrupt factor list Redundant CPU I No Interrupt Factors Priority Ranking I No Interrupt Factors Priority Ranking I0 Interrupt module QI60 1st point 208 I32 2 Error 2 3 Errors that stop operation 1 I1 2nd ...

Страница 721: ...I50 to 255 I50 has the highest priority Priority order 22 and I255 has the lowest priority Priority order 227 5 When an interrupt occurs CAN T EXECUTE I error code 4220 does not occur even though no interrupt pointer exists in the program Table10 26 Interrupt pointer No and interrupt factor list Universal model QCPU I No Interrupt Factors Priority Ranking I No Interrupt Factors Priority Ranking I0...

Страница 722: ...CPU Programming Manual SFC 10 12 3 Network No designation device J 1 Definition The network No designation device is used to designate the network No in link instructions 2 Designating network No designation device The network No designation device is designated in the link instruction as shown in Figure 10 91 Remark Refer to the following manual for the link instructions Q Corresponding MELSECNET...

Страница 723: ...d to intelligent function module to designate I O numbers 2 Designating the I O No designation device I O No designation devices are designated with the intelligent function module instructions as shown in Figure 10 92 Remark For details on intelligent function module instructions refer to the corresponding manual for the intelligent function module to be used Figure 10 92 How to specify the I O N...

Страница 724: ...e programs to macro registration ladders as macro instruction argument devices among the devices used in the ladders registered as macro with GX Developer Designate devices that correspond to the macro argument devices used in the macro registration ladders in ascending order when using macro instructions in a sequence program Figure 10 93 Designating the macro instruction argument device Transfer...

Страница 725: ...CPU Module Appendices Index POINT 1 With the macro instruction argument device VD0 to 9 can be used in one ladder registered as a macro instruction 2 The GX Developer read mode provides an option to view a program in macro instruction format To change the display choose View Display macro instruction format Figure 10 94 Settings for macro instruction display Change of macro instruction display ...

Страница 726: ...or word data 16 bits K 32768 to 32767 For 2 word data 32 bits K 2147483648 to 2147483647 POINT The most significant bit is a sign bit 10 13 2 Hexadecimal constant H 1 Definition Hexadecimal constants are devices which designate hexadecimal or BCD data in sequence programs For BCD data designations 0 to 9 digit designations are used Hexadecimal constants are designated as H settings e g H1234 Secti...

Страница 727: ... the time of arithmetic operation Note31 Figure 10 95 Specifying the real number Table10 27 Operations when an overflow or underflow occurs CPU module Operation at overflow Operation at underflow Basic model QCPU 4100 Error occurrence 4100 Error occurrence High Performance model QCPU 4100 Error occurrence 4100 Error occurrence Process CPU 4100 Error occurrence 4100 Error occurrence Redundant CPU 4...

Страница 728: ...3 4 Character string Note32 1 Definition Character string constants are devices used to designate character strings in sequence programs They are designated by quotation marks e g ABCD1234 2 Usable characters All ASCII code characters can be used in character strings The QCPU is sensitive to uppercase and lowercase characters 3 Number of designated characters Character strings extend from the desi...

Страница 729: ...ces can be shared by all the programs being executed in the CPU module Global device data are stored in the CPU module device memory and can be used by all programs Note33 Note34 Figure 10 96 Using the global device Since the Basic model QCPU cannot execute multiple programs it does not support the function that makes each program independent by local device designation Basic Note10 32 Basic Note1...

Страница 730: ...bal devices 2 When executing multiple programs the shared range for all programs and the independent range for each program must be designated in advance Section 10 14 2 Figure 10 97 Determination of device using range Example Internal relay M0 Shared by all programs Used in program A Used in program B Used in program C The range of use must be designated for each program ...

Страница 731: ...y of the CPU module Therefore the scan time is extended by this data exchange time Figure 10 98 Using the local devices Figure 10 99 Saving and restoration of local device file Y12 M7000 Y11 M7000 ON OFF M7000 ON OFF M7000 If local devices are designated as M7000 or later they can be used independently in each program executing M7000 or later Program B Program A M7000 ON OFF data M7000 ON OFF data...

Страница 732: ...ranges of devices used as local devices When using as local devices set the ranges of the devices used as local devices in the device of the PLC parameter dialog box Note that the range designated for local devices applies to all programs and cannot be changed for individual programs For example if the local device range is designated as M0 to M100 this range will be used for local devices in all ...

Страница 733: ...g Time 12 Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index b Setting the drive and file name where local devices will be stored After setting the ranges of the devices used as local devices set the drive and file name where the local device file will be stored in the PLC file of the PLC parameter dialog box Figure 10 102 PLC file ...

Страница 734: ...e stored in the standard RAM clears the sampling trace file To keep the trace result in your personal computer perform the following operations Click the Trace result PLC read button on the sampling trace execution screen to read the trace result in the personal computer Section 6 14 4 Click the Trace result button to display the trace result Click the Create CSV file button to store the trace res...

Страница 735: ...in this section set the following Select File usability setting from Program in PLC parameter and set programs that use local devices Note35 Figure 10 104 Configuration of local device file restoration area Figure 10 105 File usability setting screen Universal UD Note10 34 When setting local devices for each program in the Universal model QCPU check the versions of CPU module and GX Developer Appe...

Страница 736: ...ameter setting Table 9 26 shows the creation condition of local device file Create a file Do not create a file 1 It indicates the range setting for local devices in the device setting Table10 29 Creation condition of local device file PLC parameter setting File creation Error detection PLC file setting Device setting 1 File usability setting Set Set Use PLC file setting Not used Not set Use PLC fi...

Страница 737: ...ecial relay SM776 SM776 Operation OFF Executes calculation by the local devices that are used by the file where the subroutine program was called ON Executes calculation by the local devices that are used by the file where the subroutine program is stored Figure 10 106 When SM776 is OFF Figure 10 107 When SM776 is ON X0 X2 P100 D0 CALL INCP END RET P100 Subroutine program Local devices used by the...

Страница 738: ...sible to use local devices in the file where an interrupt fixed scan execution type program is stored when executing an interrupt fixed scan execution type program The local devices can be set available unavailable by special relay SM777 ON OFF setting a Operation at SM777 OFF Table10 31 Switching over local devices by setting ON OFF for a special relay SM777 SM777 Operation OFF Executes operation...

Страница 739: ...le units Setting in file unit is not enabled If the ON OFF setting of SM777 is changed while a sequence program is executed the control is made according to the information after change Remark For details on SM777 refer to Appendix 1 7 Clearing the Local Device Data Clear the local device data in either of the following methods The PLC is powered on or the CPU module is reset The CPU module enters...

Страница 740: ... PAUSE status RUN status Program check CC Link IE controller network refresh I O refresh Common processing time END processing of DUTY instruction No processing performed when DUTY instruction is not executed Is program terminated 1 NO YES Operation status identification MELSECNET H refresh CC Link refresh Refresh by intelligent function module parameter set on GX Configurator Various function com...

Страница 741: ... free time Constant wait processing No processing performed when not set WDT reset scan time calculation STOP PAUSE processing RUN status STOP PAUSE status Refresh by intelligent function module parameter set on GX Configurator Various function compatibility processing 2 Common processing time Low speed program operation time Module refresh time Common END processing time Execution time of various...

Страница 742: ... of DUTY instruction No processing performed when DUTY instruction is not executed Program execution Is program terminated 1 MELSECNET H refresh CC Link refresh Service processing Low speed program execution executed only for free time Constant wait processing No processing performed when not set WDT reset scan time calculation I O refresh time END processing time and the relevant instruction Modu...

Страница 743: ...identification Various function compatibility processing 3 RUN status STOP PAUSE status Is program terminated 2 Refresh by intelligent function module parameter set on GX Configurator Common END processing time Scan time I O refresh time Tracking processing time END processing time and the relevant instruction Instruction execution time Module refresh time Execution time of various functions proce...

Страница 744: ...WDT reset scan time calculation STOP PAUSE processing RUN status STOP PAUSE status Refresh by intelligent function module parameter set on GX Configurator Various function compatibility processing 2 Common processing time Module refresh time Common END processing time Execution time of various functions processed at END Instruction execution time I O refresh time END processing time and the releva...

Страница 745: ...mber of input points 16 N1 number of output points 16 N2 Refer to Table11 1 for N1 and N2 Note1 Table11 1 I O refresh time CPU module N1 N2 Q3 B Q3 SB Q3 RB Q3 DB Q5 B Q6 B Q6 RB Q6 WRB QA1S6 B QA6 B Q3 B Q3 SB Q3 RB Q3 DB Q5 B Q6 B Q6 RB Q6 WRB QA1S6 B QA6 B Q00JCPU 2 05 s 2 95 s 1 25 s 2 20 s Q00CPU 2 00 s 2 75 s 1 20 s 2 05 s Q01CPU 1 95 s 2 70 s 1 15 s 2 00 s Q02CPU 2 2 s 2 9 s 4 3 s 4 3 s 1 3...

Страница 746: ...pecified in that instruction In this case the END processing time changes with the number of times specified in the DUTY instruction Note2 4 Instruction execution time The instruction execution time is the sum of processing times of the instructions used in the program to be executed by the CPU module Refer to the following manual for the processing time of each instruction QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Prog...

Страница 747: ...f interrupt program B1 CPU module Fixed scan interrupt I28 to 31 processing Multiple CPU synchronous interrupt I45 Interrupt processing from QI60 I0 to 15 1 interrupt from the intelligent function module I50 to 127 Without high speed start With high speed start Without high speed start With high speed start Without high speed start With high speed start Q00JCPU 175 s 150 s 350 s 325 s Q00CPU 145 s...

Страница 748: ...HCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU 26 s 7 s Table11 5 Overhead time of fixed scan execution type program Note11 3 CPU module Without high speed start With high speed start Q02CPU 380 s 230 s Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 165 s 100 s Q02UCPU 73 s 25 s Q03UDCPU Q03UDECPU 73 s 24 s Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCP...

Страница 749: ...3 s 0 35 n 0 05 103 s Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 15 n 0 03 103 s 0 15 n 0 03 103 s Q02UCPU 12 N1 0 22 N2 N3 16 220 s 12 N1 0 22 N2 N3 16 60 s Q03UDCPU Q03UDECPU 8 N1 0 22 N2 N3 16 80 s 8 N1 0 22 N2 N3 16 20 s Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU 8 N1 0 10 N2 N3 16 80 s 8 N1 0 10 N2 N3 16 2...

Страница 750: ...ate processing time CPU module END processing time When clock data set request is issued When clock data read request is issued Q00JCPU 1 25 ms 0 04 ms Q00CPU 0 99 ms 0 03 ms Q01CPU 0 98 ms 0 02 ms Q02CPU 0 26 ms 0 01 ms Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 11 ms 0 005 ms Q02UCPU 0 044 ms 0 017 ms Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU...

Страница 751: ...r dialog box of GX Developer Time required for program memory check 1 Indicates the step set in the PLC RAS setting 2 of the PLC parameter dialog box Section 9 1 2 5 Note6 Basic High Performance Note11 5 Note11 5 Since the Basic model QCPU and High Performance model QCPU do not support the setting for program memory check it is not necessary to be conscious of this processing time Basic Note11 5 H...

Страница 752: ...ller network CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual b Refresh of MELSECNET H This indicates the time taken to refresh data between the link devices of the MELSECNET H network and those of the CPU module Refer to the following manual for the refresh time of MELSECNET H Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System R...

Страница 753: ...esh points for the analog digital conveter module Q64AD is 4 points when the module is mounted on the Q01CPU main base unit 0 249 ms 0 085 0 041 4 Table11 10 When intelligent function module is mounted on main base unit CPU module KN1 KN2 Q00JCPU 115 s 55 s Q00CPU 91 s 46 s Q01CPU 85 s 41 s Q02CPU 53 s 13 s Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 27 ...

Страница 754: ... the MELSECNET H Ethernet CC Link or serial communication module Communication with serial communication module or Ethernet interface module This indicates the time taken to communicate with the serial communication module or Ethernet module Refer to the following manual for the time taken for communication with each module Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Table11 12 Mon...

Страница 755: ...ssing time Q02CPU 0 017ms Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 011ms Table11 14 When monitor condition has been set CPU module Processing time Specified step match Specified device match Q02CPU 0 05ms 0 01ms Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 03ms 0 01ms Table11 15 shows the processing time ...

Страница 756: ...for Multiple CPU data transmission when the Multiple CPU high speed transmission function is used Refer to the following manual for the Multiple CPU high speed transmission processing time QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System Note7 Table11 17 Common processing time CPU module Common processing time Q00JCPU 0 66ms Q00CPU 0 60ms Q01CPU 0 52ms Q02CPU 0 40ms Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU ...

Страница 757: ...not prolonged even if the latch range of the file register R ZR extended data register D and extended link register W are set POINT Minimize the number of latch points to reduce the scan time The following alternative methods can also reduce the number of latch points Move data to be latched to a file register Store the device data that is updated not so often to the standard ROM using the SP DEVS...

Страница 758: ...nternal relays bit devices and 50 points of data registers word devices are set as sampling trace data CPU module Processing time Standard RAM Q02CPU 0 16ms Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 06ms Q02UCPU 0 15ms Q03UDCPU Q03UDECPU 0 07ms Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU 0 06ms SRAM card Q02CPU...

Страница 759: ... n indicates the number of executing programs 2 It is the processing time when the number of local device points is 10k Note11 Table11 20 Local device setting CPU module Processing time Standard RAM Q02CPU 3 52 n 103 s 2 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 1 54 n 103 s 2 Q02UCPU 12 N1 0 22 N2 N3 16 140 n s Q03UDCPU Q03UDECPU 8 N1 0 22 N2 N3 16 50...

Страница 760: ...tine in the same file is called Increase of scan time when a subroutine in another file is called Q02CPU 0 35 n 0 05 103 s 0 70 n 0 10 103 s Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 15 n 0 03 103 s 0 30 n 0 05 103 s Q02UCPU 0 00 s 24 N1 0 44 N2 N3 16 280 s Q03UDCPU Q03UDECPU 0 00 s 16 N1 0 44 N2 N3 16 100 s Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q0...

Страница 761: ...erhead time taken to execute multiple programs CPU module Processing time Q02CPU 0 08 n ms 1 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 03 n ms 1 Q02UCPU 0 04 n ms 1 Q03UDCPU Q03UDECPU 0 02 n ms 1 Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU 0 02 n ms 1 Table11 24 Processing time taken for removal setting of memo...

Страница 762: ...cessing time taken when file registers are used CPU module Processing time Standard RAM Q02CPU 1 03ms Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 0 41ms Q02UCPU 0 082ms Q03UDCPU Q03UDECPU 0 043ms Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU 0 041ms SRAM card Q02CPU 1 14 n ms 1 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCP...

Страница 763: ... for online change No change Re setting Q00JCPU Max 2 1ms Max 30ms Q00CPU Max 1 7ms Max 26ms Q01CPU Max 1 7ms Max 36ms Q02CPU Max 4ms Max 10ms 1 Max 30ms Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU Max 2ms Max 4ms 1 Max 90ms Q02UCPU Max 1 2ms Max 1 2ms Q03UDCPU Q03UDECPU Max 1 0ms Max 1 0ms Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q1...

Страница 764: ...Module verify General data processing The following table indicates the scan time increased when system monitor is executed with a total of 12 intelligent function modules mounted on one extension base unit Note14 Figure 11 6 Multiple CPU setting screen Table11 28 Scan time increased when system monitor is used When a total of 12 intelligent function modules are mounted CPU module model name Scan ...

Страница 765: ...ne program call instruction CALL P FCALL P ECALL P EFCALL P XCALL P RET Note15 Note16 Table11 29 Processing time taken to execute scan time measurement of CPU by GX Developer CPU Module Processing Time Q02CPU 120 0 16 5 number of branch instructions s 1 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 52 0 7 0 number of branch instructions s 1 Q02UCPU 112 0 4...

Страница 766: ... module Processing time With power supply error 1 Without power supply error 1 Q02UCPU 0 09ms 0 09ms Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU 0 043ms 0 052ms Basic High Performance Process Note11 16 Note11 16 Note11 16 Redundant Note11 16 Since the Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU and Redundant CPU do not use the...

Страница 767: ...setting POINT After selecting Do not use special relays special registers SM1000 SD1000 and later removing the check mark on the setting screen replace the following A series compatible special relays with the Q series dedicated special relays A series compatible special relays SM1000 to 1299 Q series dedicated special relays SM0 to 999 A series compatible special registers SD1000 to 1299 Q series...

Страница 768: ...mark on the setting screen in the PLC system setting Remark Refer to the following manual for the arithmetic processing time of the instruction using a floating point QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Note22 Figure 11 8 Floating point arithmetic processing screen The Basic model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU do not support the floating point arithm...

Страница 769: ...me of the program can be shortened by selecting Not used in the file usability setting Note23 Figure 11 9 File usability setting screen The Basic model QCPU does not support the file usability setting The Universal model QCPU can set the local device only When using the file usablility setting with the Universal model QCPU check the versions of the CPU module and GX developer Appendix 4 5 Note11 2...

Страница 770: ...e by changing the settings 11CPU MODULE PROCESSING TIME POINT Time reduction by this setting is enabled only when Use the same file name as the program is selected in the PLC file Figure 11 10 PLC file Valid only when setting is Use the same file name as program ...

Страница 771: ...ut monitor Indicates the status in which monitor is not executed by GX Developer or serial communication function Table11 33 Constant scan accuracy CPU module Without monitor without user interrupt With monitor without user interrupt Without monitor with user interrupt With monitor with user interrupt Q00JCPU 0 20ms 0 90ms Interrupt program execution time refer to Section 11 1 2 4 a Sum of the fol...

Страница 772: ...nts used etc must be determined in advance 1 Program size considerations Examine whether programs and parameters can be stored within the program capacity executable in the used CPU module Section 5 4 3 1 The program capacities executable in CPU modules are shown in Table12 1 2 Applications of devices and setting of their numbers of points Consider the applications of the devices used in a program...

Страница 773: ...alled with GX Developer to the CPU module Choose Online Format PLC memory on GX Developer and format the program memory Power the PLC OFF and then ON or reset the CPU module Choose Online Write to PLC on GX Developer select Program memory device memory and write the parameters and program At this time write the PLC parameters and program in the status immediately after the new project was created ...

Страница 774: ...12 1 2 Hardware check 12PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAM TO CPU MODULE Remark Refer to the following manual for the installation and mounting procedures of the CPU module QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection ...

Страница 775: ...iting a program to the program memory Section 5 1 2 When storing the program into the standard ROM and executing boot run perform the procedure given in this section and then carry out the procedure given in Section 12 1 4 Procedural steps shown in boxes are performed at the GX Developer and those shown in boxes are performed in the Basic model QCPU Start Start GX Developer Set the project Change ...

Страница 776: ... the RUN status End Is the ERR LED of the CPU module on flickering YES NO Is boot run executed YES NO Choose Online Write to PLC on GX Deveoper select Program memory and write the parameters created program and device initial values to the program memory Choose Online Format PLC memory on GX Deveoper and format the program memory or standard RAM Choose Diagnostics System Monitor on GX Developer or...

Страница 777: ... run flowchart Start Continued from Section 11 1 3 End When the RUN STOP RESET switch is in the RUN position set the switch to the STOP position Choose Online Write to PLC on GX Deveoper and write the parameters and program to the program memory Power the PLC OFF and then ON or reset the CPU module Has the special relay SM660 turned ON YES NO Choose Online Write to PLC Flash ROM Write the program ...

Страница 778: ...t The High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU or Universal model QCPU allows the file name to be changed to store multiple programs When creating multiple programs determine the program structuring unit by process by function 3 Setting the execution condition of created program When executing multiple programs set an execution condition to each program Section 3 3 6 Programs cannot b...

Страница 779: ... Time 12 Procedure for Writing Program to CPU Module Appendices Index 5 Device initial value setting Set the data necessary as the initial values to the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU or Universal model QCPU device memory and intelligent function module buffer memory Section 6 26 6 Examination of boot run When executing boot run make the boot file setting of the PLC paramete...

Страница 780: ...the personal computer which is installed with GX Developer to the CPU module Choose Online Format PLC memory on GX Developer and format the program memory Choose Online Write to PLC on GX Developer select Program memory device memory and write the parameters and program At this time write the PLC parameters and program in the status immediately after the new project was created using GX Developer ...

Страница 781: ...Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Figure 12 4 Hardware check flowchart Power the PLC OFF and then ON or reset the CPU module Set the RUN STOP switch to the RUN position to place the PLC in the RUN status Is the RUN LED of the CPU module on Choose Diagnostics System Monitor on GX Developer or perform PLC Diagnostics to check the error factor and remove the error factor YES NO Troubl...

Страница 782: ... or memory card and executing boot run perform the procedure given in this section and then carry out the procedure given in Section 12 2 5 In the following procedure indicates the operation on the GX Developer side and indicates that on the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU or Universal model QCPU side Note12 1 Universal UD Start Start GX Developer Set the project Change the n...

Страница 783: ... s Manual Redundant System 5 RUN STOP RESET switch for the Universal model QCPU 6 The parameter valid drive setting by the DIP switch is not necessary for the Universal model QCPU Section 5 2 11 1 2 Set the device initial value range Section 6 26 In the PLC file setting of the PLC parameter dialog box set the device initial value file name Connect the personal computer which is installed with GX D...

Страница 784: ...hart for writing one program POINT In the MELSECNET H system where the Universal model QCPU No 1 is the control CPU the Universal model QCPU can communicate with the QnUCPU where MISSING PARA has been occurred via the MELSECNET H For the network No 1 only 2 Power the PLC OFF and then ON or reset the CPU module Set the RUN STOP switch to the RUN position to place the PLC in the RUN status End Is th...

Страница 785: ...y Section 5 2 2 When storing the programs into the standard ROMNote12 2 or memory card and executing boot run perform the procedure given in this section and then carry out the procedure given in Section 12 2 5 Note1 In the following procedure indicates the operation on the GX Developer side and indicates that on the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU or Universal model QCPU sid...

Страница 786: ... dialog box set the device initial value file name Set the device memory Use the device initial value YES NO In the PLC file setting in the PLC parameter designate the name of the local device file In the device setting item in the PLC parameter designate the name of the local device range Designate local devices YES NO In the PLC system setting item in the PLC parameter designate the first pointe...

Страница 787: ...ing memory Program Program memory Parameter Memory set as the parameter valid drive with the DIP switches Device initial value Memory specified in the PLC file setting of the PLC parameter dialog box 5 RUN STOP RESET switch for the Universal model QCPU 2 3 Set the RUN STOP switch to STOP and the RESET L CLR switch to the neutral position and power ON the PLC the ERR LED turns on 2 Choose Online Fo...

Страница 788: ...ersal model QCPU No 1 is the control CPU the Universal model QCPU can communicate with the QnUCPU where MISSING PARA has been occurred via the MELSECNET H For the network No 1 only NO NO 3 Choose Diagnostics System Monitor on GX Developer or perform PLC Diagnostics to check the error factor and remove the error factor Is the ERR LED of the CPU module on flickering YES QCPU User s Manual Hardware D...

Страница 789: ...e 12 7 Boot run flowchart Start Continued from Se ction 11 2 3 11 2 4 When the RUN STOPT switch is in the RUN position set the switch to the STOP position In the boot file setting of the PLC parameter dialog box set the parameter program device initial value and device comment file names to be read from the standard ROM or memory card In the program setting of the PLC parameter dialog box set the ...

Страница 790: ...r sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer S U Set by both system and user When set Indicated only for registers set by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when...

Страница 791: ... New Rem SM16 Error individual information OFF No error individual information ON Error individual information When SM0 is ON turns ON if there is error individual information S Error New SM50 Error reset OFF ON Error reset Conducts error reset operation U New SM51 Battery low latch OFF Normal ON Battery low Turns ON if battery voltage at CPU module or memory card drops below rated value Remains O...

Страница 792: ...o SD91 M9109 SM92 Corresponds to SD92 M9110 SM93 Corresponds to SD93 M9111 SM94 Corresponds to SD94 M9112 SM95 Corresponds to SD95 M9113 SM96 Corresponds to SD96 M9114 SM97 Corresponds to SD97 New SM98 Corresponds to SD98 New SM99 Corresponds to SD99 New SM100 Serial communication function using flag OFF Serial communication function is not used ON Serial communication function is used Stores the ...

Страница 793: ...Clock data display OFF Ignored ON Display Displays clock data as month day hour minute and second at the LED display at front of CPU module Enabled only for Q3ACPU and Q4ACPU U M9027 Q3A Q4A Q4AR SM213 Clock data read request OFF Ignored ON Read request When this relay is ON clock data is read to SD210 to SD213 as BCD values U M9028 Rem SM220 CPU No 1 preparation completed OFF CPU No 1 preparation...

Страница 794: ...anceled Comes ON when the No 4 CPU is resetting including the case where the CPU module is removed from the base The other CPUs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Qn H 1 QnPH QnU 5 SM244 No 1 CPU error flag OFF No 1 CPU normal ON No 1 CPU during stop error Goes OFF when the No 1 CPU is normal including a continuation error Comes ON when the No 1 CPU is during a stop error Q00 Q01 1 Qn H 1 Qn...

Страница 795: ...n OFF Operative network ON Standby network Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed S Initial New SM266 OFF Reads ON Does not read For refresh from link to CPU module B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module U New SM267 OFF Writes ON Does not write For refresh from CPU module to link B W etc designate whether to write t...

Страница 796: ...Q00J Q00 Q01 1 SM328 Clear processing mode when end step is reached OFF Clear processing is performed ON Clear processing is not performed Select whether clear processing will be performed or not if active steps other than the ones being held exist in the block when the end step is reached When this relay turns OFF all active steps are forcibly terminated to terminate the block When this relay is ...

Страница 797: ...essing New QnA Qn H QnPH SM405 Low speed execution type programAfter RUN OFF for 1 scan only After RUN OFF for 1 scan only This connection can be used for low speed execution type programs only S Every END processing New SM409 0 01 second clock Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at 5 ms interval When Programmable Controller power supply is turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed goes from ...

Страница 798: ...3 M9023 SM424 User timing clock No 4 M9024 SM430 User timing clock No 5 For use with SM420 to SM424 low speed programs S Every END processing New QnA Qn H QnPH SM431 User timing clock No 6 SM432 User timing clock No 7 SM433 User timing clock No 8 SM434 User timing clock No 9 TableApp 5 Special relay Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by When Set Corres ponding ACPU M9 Corresponding CPU SM510 Low ...

Страница 799: ...emory card Turned OFF by the system after the memory card is removed This contact can be used only when SM604 and SM605 are OFF S U New Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU SM620 Drive 3 4 usable flag OFF Unusable ON Use enabled Always ON S Initial New QCPU Memory card B usable flags OFF Unusable ON Use enabled ON when memory card B is ready for use by user S Initial New Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Q4AR SM621 Memory card B pro...

Страница 800: ...data backup normally Turned OFF when data is backuped to the standard ROM by the latch data backup normally S New QnU SM676 Specification of restore repeated execution OFF Not specified ON Specified If latch data backup is performed when SM676 is ON restore the data every time turning ON from OFF the power supply from the next power on Delete the backuped latch data or restore the data every time ...

Страница 801: ... processing In processing of AD57 S1 goes ON when canvas screen is divided for transfer S Instruction execution M9066 SM714 Communication request registration area BUSY signal OFF Communication request to remote terminal module enabled ON Communication request to remote terminal module disabled Used to determine whether communications requests to remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S...

Страница 802: ...cution New Qn H QnPRH QnA SM774 PID bumpless processing for complete derivative OFF Matched ON Not matched Specifies whether to match the set value SV with the process value PV or not in the manual mode U New QnA Q00J Q00 Q01 4 Qn H QnPRH QnU SM775 Selection of refresh processing during COM instruction execution OFF Performs link refresh ON Performs no link refresh Select whether link refresh proc...

Страница 803: ...ted instruction of Multiple CPU high speed transmission target CPU CPU No 2 is less than the number of blocks specified by SD797 Turns ON at instruction execution Turns OFF when the empty area exists at END processing S When instruction END processing executed New QnU SM798 Block information using dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU high speed transmission for CPU No 3 OFF Block is secured ON Bl...

Страница 804: ... after trace is triggered S Status change New Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU After sampling trace trigger Goes ON after sampling trace trigger S Status change New QnA SM805 Trace completed OFF Not completed ON End Switches ON at completion of trace S Status change M9043 Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU Sampling trace completed Goes ON at completion of sampling trace S Status change M9043 QnA SM806 Status latch preparatio...

Страница 805: ...ange New SM825 Step trace completed OFF Not completed ON End Goes ON at step trace completion Goes OFF when step trace is commenced S Status change M9180 SM826 Trace error OFF Normal ON Errors Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace S Status change New Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU Sampling trace error Goes ON if error occurs during execution of sampling trace S Status change New QnA SM827 Sta...

Страница 806: ...llowing are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification column When a special relay for modification is provided the device number should be changed to the provided QCPU QnACPU special relay When is provided the converted special relay can be used for the device number When is provided the device number does not work with QCPU QnACPU TableApp 11 Special relay ACPU Special Rela...

Страница 807: ...SM1016 is on Qn H QnPH M9017 SM1017 Data memory clear flag OFF lgnored ON Output claered Clears the unlatched data memory other than special relays and special egisters in remote run mode from computer etc when SM1017 is on Qn H QnPH M9020 SM1020 User timing clock No 0 Relay which repeats on off at intervals of predetermined scan When power is turned on or reset is per formed the clock starts with...

Страница 808: ...ion is executed Reset when instruction is executed M9044 SM1044 SM803 Sampling trace OFF ON Same as execution ON OFF Same as execution Turning on off SM803 can execute instruction SM803 is forcibly turned on off by a peripheral device When switched from OFF to ON instruction When switched from ON to OFF instruction The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for the sampling trace At scann...

Страница 809: ...rten the search time in the A8UPU A8PUJ In this case the scan time is extended by 10 QnA Qn H QnPH M9081 SM1081 SM714 Communication request registration area BUSY signal OFF Empty spaces in communication request registration area ON No empty spaces in communication request registration area Indication of communication enable disable to remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 A2C or A5...

Страница 810: ...flag OFF Trace started ON Trace completed Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is completed Reset when sampling trace is started QnA M9181 SM1181 SM822 Active step sampling trace execution flag OFF Trace not being executed ON Trace execution under way Set when sampling trace is being executed Reset when sampling trace is completed or suspended M9182 SM1182 SM821 Active step sampling tra...

Страница 811: ...Mismatch Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of the master station in tier two matches that of the master station in tier three in a three tier system Valid for only the master station in a three tier system M9208 SM1208 Sets master station B and W transmissionrange for lower link master stations only OFF Transmits to tier2 and tier 3 ON Transmits to tier2 only Depends on whether ...

Страница 812: ...M1246 Data not received OFF Reception ON No reception Depends on whether or not data has been received from the master station M9247 SM1247 Data not received OFF Reception ON No reception Depends on whether or not a tier three station has received data from its master station in a three tier system M9250 SM1250 Parameters not received OFF Reception ON No reception Depends on whether or not link pa...

Страница 813: ...arted OFF Initial start ON Hot start Turns on when the CPU module operation mode is hot start when the redundant system is started up S Initial New SM1511 System A identification flag Distinguishes between system A and system B The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is disconnected S Initial New QnPRH SM1512 System B identification flag SM1513 Operation status when CPU is start...

Страница 814: ... operation Control System was System B if power supply is supplied or reset is released on both SYSTEM together After RUN ON for 1 scan only by System A side S Each END New SM1520 Data tracking transfer trigger specification OFF No trigger ON Trigger SM1520 Block 1 In the case of Q4AR When data is transferred by the data tracking instruction S TRUCK the target block is specified as trigger In the ...

Страница 815: ...ck 52 SM1572 SM1572 Block 53 SM1573 SM1573 Block 54 SM1574 SM1574 Block 55 SM1575 SM1575 Block 56 SM1576 SM1576 Block 57 SM1577 SM1577 Block 58 SM1578 SM1578 Block 59 SM1579 SM1579 Block 60 SM1580 SM1580 Block 61 SM1581 SM1581 Block 62 SM1582 SM1582 Block 63 SM1583 SM1583 Block 64 SM1590 Switching status from the network module OFF Normal ON Switching unsuccessful Turns ON when switching could not...

Страница 816: ...urned from OFF to ON memory copy dos not start if the I O No of the copy destination standby system CPU module 3D1H is not stored in SD1595 QnPRH SM1596 Memory copy to other system status flag OFF Memory copy not executed ON Memory copy executed Turns on while memory is copied to other system Turns off when memory copy execution has completed S Starting to copy finish SM1597 Memory copy to other s...

Страница 817: ...resent ON Common error information present Turns on when there is common error information at other system Corresponds to status of SM5 at other system S Each END SM5 SM1616 Error individual information OFF No error individual information ON Error individual information Turns on when there is error individual information and the SM1600 is on S Each END SM16 Q4AR SM1626 Error individual information...

Страница 818: ...canceled the system automatically turns off SM1709 2 System switching due to any of the following conditions is executed even during online program change redundant tracking regardless of the status of this relay Power off reset hardware failure CPU stop error 3 In either of the following statuses the system switching disable status can also be canceled by this relay Multiple block online program ...

Страница 819: ...M1718 SM1718 Block 7 SM1719 SM1719 Block 8 SM1720 SM1720 Block 9 SM1721 SM1721 Block 10 SM1722 SM1722 Block 11 SM1723 SM1723 Block 12 SM1724 SM1724 Block 13 SM1725 SM1725 Block 14 SM1726 SM1726 Block 15 SM1727 SM1727 Block 16 SM1728 SM1728 Block 17 SM1729 SM1729 Block 18 SM1730 SM1730 Block 19 SM1731 SM1731 Block 20 SM1732 SM1732 Block 21 SM1733 SM1733 Block 22 SM1734 SM1734 Block 23 SM1735 SM1735...

Страница 820: ...dule with input power OFF detected ON Redundant power supply module with input power OFF detected Turns ON when one or more redundant power supply modules with input power OFF are detected Turns on if any of SD1780 bits is on Turns off if all bits of SD1780 are off Turns OFF when the main base unit is not the redundant main base unit Q38RB 0 communication with peripheral device is executed 1 commu...

Страница 821: ...hen set Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed Set by S Set by system U Set by user sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer S U Set by both system and user When set Indicated only for registers set by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply i...

Страница 822: ... switching cause for Q4ARCPU Redundant CPU only 6 Reason s for tracking capacity excess error specific to Redundant CPU 7 Base No Power supply No The first 5 digits of serial number 10042 or higer are chosen for Universal model QCPU 8 Tracking transmission data classification specific to Redundant CPU For a multiple CPU system that consists of the Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Proce...

Страница 823: ...ot where a module can be mounted 4 Definitions of base No and slot No Base No Value used to identify the base unit on which the CPU module has been mounted The following shows the definition of the base No Slot No Value used to identify the slot of each base unit and the module mounted on that slot The I O slot 0 slot on the right side of the CPU slot of the main base unit is defined as the slot o...

Страница 824: ...11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 6 7 Number Meaning File name ASCII code 8 characters Extension 2EH ASCII code 3 characters Pattern Block No Step No transition condition Sequence step No L Sequence step No H 0 0 0 0 to 0 1 2 3 4 15 14 to Not used Bit number SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11...

Страница 825: ...SD14 SD15 Number Meaning System switching condition 13 Control system switching instruction argument Empty 1 Power OFF reset hardware failure watchdog timer error 2 Stop error except watchdog timer error 3 System switching request by network module 16 Control system switching instruction 17 Control system switching request from GX Developer 0 No system switching condition default SD15 SD5 SD8 SD9 ...

Страница 826: ...lassification Stores the data classification during tracking 15 Details of data classification S Error New QnPRH SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Number Meaning Data type 15 Empty b15 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 to b14 0 b6 Each bit Device data Signal flow PIDINIT S PIDINIT instruction data SFC execution data System switching request Operation m...

Страница 827: ... s Manual of the CPU module used S Error New Rem SD17 SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 SD16 SD17 SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 6 ABCDEFGH IJK 42H B 41H A 44H D 43H C 46H F 45H E 48H H 47H G 49H I 2EH 4BH K 4AH J b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Number Meaning Drive File name ASCII code 8 characters Extension 2EH ASCII code 3 characters Vacancy Example File name SD16 SD17 SD18 SD19 SD2...

Страница 828: ...l device value 51H 44H 52H QDR File register 51H 44H 53H QDS Simulation data For QnA 51H 44H 4CH QDL Local device Other than the Basic model QCPU 51H 54H 44H QTD Sampling trace data Other than the Basic model QCPU 51H 54H 4CH QTL Status latch data For QnA 51H 54H 50H QTP Program trace data For QnA 51H 54H 52H QTR SFC trace file For QnA 51H 46H 44H QFD Breakdown history data Other than the Basic mo...

Страница 829: ...iffers between two systems in backup mode only 3 Hardware failure power OFF reset or watchdog timer error occurring in control system 9 Online change 11 System switching being executed 8 During memory copy from control system to standby system 6 Standby system is in stop error except watchdog timer error 4 Preparing for tracking 5 Time limit exceeded 2 Hardware failure power OFF reset or watchdog ...

Страница 830: ...dundant CPU or Universal model QCPU is used the corresponding bits always remain OFF since the memory card B is a standard memory S Error New SD53 AC DC DOWN detection Number of times for AC DC DOWN detection Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85 AC power 65 DC power of the rating during operation of the CPU module the value is incremented by 1 and stored in BIN code The counter repeat...

Страница 831: ...on monitoring timer setting value Enabled only when SFC program exists F number for timer set value and time over error Corresponds to SM90 Set the annunciator number F number that will be turned ON when the step transition monitoring timer setting or monitoring timeout occurs Turning ON any of SM90 to SM99 during an active step starts the timer and if the transition condition next to the correspo...

Страница 832: ...6 9600bps 192 19 2kbps 384 38 4kbps 576 57 6kbps 1152 115 2kbps Other than RS 232 connection holds the data at RS 232 connection When disconnected the default value is 1152 S New Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU 3 Rem SD110 Data sending result storage area Stores the data sending result when the serial communication function is used Stores the error code at the timeout sending data S Error New Q00 Q01 SD111 Da...

Страница 833: ...SD150 I O module verify error Bit pattern in units of 16 points indicating the modules with verify errors 0 No I O verify errors 1 I O verify error present When I O modules of which data are different from those entered at power ON have been detected the I O module numbers in units of 16 points are entered in bit pattern Preset I O module numbers set in parmeters when parameter setting has been pe...

Страница 834: ...in the following format S Every END processing New QnA b15 b4 b3 b0 1 Empty to to b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 1 2 Empty 3 to to to to 1 CPU switch status 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 L CLR 2 Memory card switch Always OFF 3 DIP switch b8 through b12 correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 0 OFF 1 ON b13 through b15 are empty b15 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 1 2 Empty to to to 1 0 RUN 1 STOP 2 CPU switch status...

Страница 835: ... USER 7 Empty 4 BAT 8 MODE S Status change New QnU The following bit patterns store the status of the LEDs on the CPU module 0 is off 1 is on and 2 is flicker 1 RUN 5 BOOT 2 ERROR 6 CARD A memory card A 3 USER 7 CARD B memory card B 4 BAT ALARM 8 Empty S Status change New QnA SD202 LED off command Bit pattern of LED that is turned off Stores bit patterns of LEDs turned off Only USER and BOOT enabl...

Страница 836: ...D display color The LED display color of the LED status shown in SD201 1 to 8 S status change New QnU b15 b4 b3 b0 1 to to b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 1 to to to to 2 1 Operating status of CPU 0 1 2 3 2 STOP PAUSE cause 0 1 2 3 4 Error RUN STEP RUN For the QnACPU only STOP PAUSE Instruction in remote operation program from RUN STOP switch RUN STOP RESET switch for Basic model QCPU Remote contact Re...

Страница 837: ... of the Basic model QCPU the ERR LED turns ON when the annunciator turns ON if 7 has been set to either of priorities 1 to 11 In case of the Basic model QCPU the ERR LED does not turn ON when the annumciator turns ON if 7 has not been set to either of priorities 1 to 11 However even if 0 has been set information concerning CPU module operation stop including parameter settings errors will be indic...

Страница 838: ... of which the online module change is being performed S During online module change New QnPH QnPRH SD240 Base mode 0 Automatic mode 1 Detail mode Stores the base mode S Initial New QCPU Rem SD241 Extension stage number 0 Main base only 1 to 7 Extension stage number Stores the maximum number of the extension bases being installed S Initial New b15 b12 to b11 b8 to b7 b4 to b3 b0 to 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ex...

Страница 839: ...ximum I O Loaded maximum I O No When SM250 goes from OFF to ON the upper 2 digits of the final I O number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values S Request END New Qn H QnPH QnPRH Rem The upper 2 digits of the final I O number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values S Initial New Q00J Q00 Q01 QnU Rem SD251 Head I O number for replacement Head I O No for module replaceme...

Страница 840: ...on is identical to that for the first module QnA Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU 10 SD270 to SD274 Information from 4th module Configuration is identical to that for the first module SD280 CC Link error Error detection status 1 When Xn0 of the mounted CC Link module turns ON the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 ON 2 When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC Link module turns OFF the bit of the corre...

Страница 841: ...as parameter contents Number of points assigned for X Stores the number of points currently set for X devices S Initial New Rem SD291 Number of points assigned for Y Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices SD292 Number of points assigned for M Stores the number of points currently set for M devices SD293 Number of points assigned for L Stores the number of points currently set for ...

Страница 842: ...it binary data SD311 SD315 Time reserved for communication processing Time reserved for communication processing Reserves the designated time for communication processing with GX Developer or other units The greater the value is designated the shorter the response time for communication with other devices GX Developer serial communication units becomes If the designated value is out of the range a...

Страница 843: ...first module SD380 Ethernet instruction reception status Instruction reception status of 1st module S Initial New S Instruction execution QnPRH SD381 Ethernet instruction reception status Instruction reception status of 2nd module Configuration is identical to that for the first module SD382 Instruction reception status of 3rd module Configuration is identical to that for the first module SD383 In...

Страница 844: ...h second Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 S Status change D9022 SD414 2n second clock setting 2n second clock units Stores value n of 2n second clock Default is 30 Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 U New SD415 2nms clock setting 2nms clock units Stores value n of 2nms clock Default is 30 Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 U New Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU SD420 Scan counter Number of...

Страница 845: ...QCPU storage range is 0 to 999 S Every END processing D9018 format change SD525 Minimum scan time in 100 s units S Every END processing New SD526 Maximum scan time Maximum scan time in 1 ms units Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of an initial execution type program into SD526 and SD527 Measurement is made in 100 s units For the Universal model QCPU in 1 s units SD526 Stores th...

Страница 846: ...ores the s place Storage range 0 to 900 Cleared to 0 after the end of one low speed scan S Every END processing New QnA Qn H QnPH SD545 Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 100 s units SD546 Execution time for low speed execution type programs Execution time for low speed execution type programs in 1 ms units Stores the execution time of a low speed execution type pro...

Страница 847: ...led S Initial and card removal New Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU Memory card A typs Memory card A typs Indicates the type of memory card A installed S Initial and card removal New QnA SD602 Drive 1 Memory card RAM capacity Drive 1 capacity Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units Empty capacity after format is stored S Initial and card removal New QnA Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU SD603 Drive 2 Memory card ROM ca...

Страница 848: ...rt and OFF at boot completion 2 Turned ON when reflection of device initial value is started and OFF when reflection of device initial value is completed S Status change New QnU b0 Boot operation QBT b1 Parameters QPA b2 Device comments QCD b3 Device initial value QDI b4 File register QDR b5 Sampling trace QTD b6 Not used b7 Not used b8 Not used b9 CPU fault history QFD b10 Not used b11 Local devi...

Страница 849: ...4AR SD622 Drive 3 Standard RAM capacity Drive 3 capacity Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units Empty capacity after format is stored S Initial New Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU S Initial Card installation and removal New Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Q4AR SD623 Drive 4 Standard ROM capacity Drive 4 capacity Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units Empty capacity after format is stored S Initial New Qn H QnPH Qn...

Страница 850: ...01 SD623 Drive 4 Standard ROM capacity Drive 4 capacity Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1k byte units S Initial SD624 Drive 3 4 use conditions Drive 3 4 use conditions The conditions for usage for drive 3 4 are stored as bit patterns S Status change SD640 File register drive Drive number Stores drive number being used by file register S Status change 10 New b0 Boot operation QBT b1 Parameters QPA b2...

Страница 851: ...ile name with extension selected at the parameters or by the QCDSET instruction in ASCII code S Status change New SD652 SD653 SD654 SD655 SD656 SD660 Boot operation designation file Boot designation file drive number Stores the drive number where the boot designation file QBT is being stored S Initial New QnA Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU SD661 File name of boot designation file Stores the file name of the ...

Страница 852: ...r when backup is performed in 2 digit BCD code SD674 Backup time Minute and second Stores the minute and second when backup is performed in 2 digit BCD code SD675 Backup time Year and day of week Stores the first 2 digits of year and day of week when backup is performed in BCD code Presence absence of backup data 0 No backup data Absent Restoring not executed 1 Restore ready completion Present Res...

Страница 853: ... transferring the standard ROM flash ROM in percentage 0 to 100 0 is set when the write direction is set S At write New QnU SD687 Standard ROM write count index Write count index up to present Stores the index value for the number of write operations to the standard ROM flash ROM up to the present in BIN 32 bit value When the index value exceeds 100 thousand times FLASH ROM ERROR error code 1610 o...

Страница 854: ...ask pattern Mask pattern Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the following manner S During execution New SD716 SD717 SD718 Accumulator Accumulator For use as replacement for accumulators used in A series programs S U New SD719 SD720 Program No designation for PLOADP instruction Program No designation for PLOADP instruction Stores the program number of the program to be lo...

Страница 855: ...46 SD747 SD748 SD749 SD750 SD751 SD752 SD753 SD754 SD755 SD756 SD757 SD758 SD759 SD760 SD761 SD762 SD763 SD764 SD765 SD766 SD767 SD768 SD769 2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd character 6th character 5th character 8th character 7th character 10th character 9th character 12th character 11th character 14th character 13th character 16th character 15th character 18th character 17th characte...

Страница 856: ...uction is executed Designation of SD778 is made valid when SM775 turns ON Refresh between multiple CPUs by COM instruction is performed under the following occasion Receiving operation from other device b4 of SD778 refresh in the CPU shared memory is turned to 1 Sending operation from host CPU b15 of SD778 communication with peripheral device is executed nonexecuted is turned to 0 When b2 refresh ...

Страница 857: ...struction as follows S During execution New Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnU SD781 to SD785 Mask pattern of IMASK instruction Mask pattern Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows S During execution New Q00J Q00 Q01 SD794 to SD795 PID limit setting for incomplete derivative 0 With limit 1 Without limit Specify the limit of each PID loop as shown below U New Qn H 13 QnPRH QnU SD794 PI...

Страница 858: ...nstruction of Multiple CPU high speed transmission is executed to the CPU No 2 and the number of empty blocks of the dedicated instruction transmission area is less than the setting value of this register SM797 is turned ON which is used as the interlock signal for consecutive execution of the dedicated instrucion of Multiple CPU high speed transmission U At 1 scan after RUN New QnU 14 15 SD798 Ma...

Страница 859: ...n D9055 format change SD813 SD814 SD815 SD816 SD840 Debug function usage Debug function usage Stores the status of the debug function usage as shown below 0 Forced ON OFF for external I O 1 Executional conditioned device test 2 to 15 Absent 0 fix 0 Not used 1 Used S Status change New QnU 1 SD806 SD807 SD808 SD809 SD810 SD811 2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd character 6th character 5th...

Страница 860: ...y system Stores the completion status of the memory copy from control system to standby system executed last 1 Stores the same value as stored into SD1596 at normal completion abnormal completion of the memory copy from control system to standby system 2 Backed up for a power failure this special register holds the status of memory copy from control system to standby system executed last 3 Cleared...

Страница 861: ...App 29 Special register Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by When Set Corres ponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU SD979 Direct MELSOFT connection Count of unlock processing failures Stores the count of unlock processing failures Range 0 to FFFEH FFFFH when the limit is exceeded S Status change New QnU 1 SD980 to SD995 Connection 1 to 16 SD997 MELSOFT connection using UDP port SD998 MELSOFT connecti...

Страница 862: ...er some of SD1200 to SD1255 corresponding to D9200 to 9255 before conversion can be set by the user program if they could be set by the user program before conversion For details on the ACPU special registers refer to the user s manual for the corresponding CPU and MELSECNET or MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manuals Remark Supplemental explanation on Special Register for Modification colum...

Страница 863: ...ation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0 I O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote I O terminals QnA Qn H QnPH D9004 SD1004 MINI link master module errors Stores setting status made at parameters Error status of the MINI S3 link detected on loaded AJ71PT32 S3 is stored QnA D9005 SD1005 AC DOWN counter Number of times for AC DOW...

Страница 864: ...error has occurred is stored in BIN code Thereafter each time operation error occurs the contents of SD1010 are renewed Qn H QnPH D9011 SD1011 Error step Step number at which operation error has occurred When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Since the step number is stored into SD1011 when...

Страница 865: ...me 10 ms units If scan time is larger than the content of SD526 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in BIN code D9020 SD1020 Constant scan Constant scan time User sets in 10 ms units Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples of 10 ms 0 No setting 1 to 200 Set Program is executed at intervals of set value 10 ms D90...

Страница 866: ...ndition At scanning 0 At time Time 10 msec unit The value is stored into SD1044 in BIN code D9049 SD1049 Work area for SFC Block number of extension file register Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is used as the work area for the execution of a SFC program in a binary value Stores 0 if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller which cannot be expansion file register No 1 is ...

Страница 867: ...serial communication module the serial communication module writes reads data automatically to make communication checks QnA Qn H QnPH D9081 SD1081 SD714 Number of empty blocks in communications request registrtion area Number of empty blocks in communications request registration area Stores the number of empty blocks in the communication request registration area to the remote terminal module co...

Страница 868: ...ints indicating the modules with verification errors When I O modules of which data are different from those entered at power ON have been detected the I O module numbers in units of 16 points are entered in bit pattern Preset I O module numbers set in parmeters when parameter setting has been performed I O module verify check is executed also to remote I O station modules If normal status is rest...

Страница 869: ... executing instruction the contents of SD64 to SD71 are shifted upward by one For A3N A3HCPU it can be performed by use of INDICATOR RESET switch on front of CPU module When there are 8 annunciator detections the 9th one is not stored into SD64 to SD71 even if detected QnA Qn H QnPH D9126 SD1126 SD65 D9127 SD1127 SD66 D9128 SD1128 SD67 D9129 SD1129 SD68 D9130 SD1130 SD69 D9131 SD1131 SD70 D9132 SD...

Страница 870: ...the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET II Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become 1 Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected become 0 If a local station goes down during the operation the contents before going down are retained Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the spe...

Страница 871: ...o the station number in the register becomes 1 Example When station 7 switches to STOP mode b6 in SD1212 becomes 1 and when SD1212 is monitored its value is 64 40H D9213 SD1213 Local station operation status Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 D9214 SD1214 Local station operation status Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 D9215 SD1215 Local station operation status Stores conditi...

Страница 872: ...way Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 D9227 SD1227 Local station and remote I O station initial communications underway Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 D9228 SD1228 Local station and remote I O station error Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores the local or remote station numbers which are in error The bit corresponding to the station number with the error bec...

Страница 873: ...s whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET II Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become 1 Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected become 0 If a local station goes down during the operation the contents before going down are retained Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit ...

Страница 874: ...31 Special register Number Name Meaning Explanation Set by When Set Corres ponding ACPU D9 Corresponding CPU SD1300 Fuse blown module Bit pattern in units of 16 points indicating the modules whose fuses have blown 0 No blown fuse 1 Blown fuse present The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are input as a bit pattern in units of 16 points If the module numbers are set by parameter the ...

Страница 875: ... time aquisition Stores time taken from transmission to SNTP server until time is set up at CPU Range 0 to FFFEH Unit ms FFFFH when the above limit is exceeded SD1276 Forced connection invalidation Specifies forced connection invalidation Specify this when a connection is to be invalidated forcibly on the user program If invalidation is specified for a connection it stops communication and does no...

Страница 876: ...iod Basic period tome Set the basic period 1 second units use for the process control instruction using floating point data U New Q4AR QnPH SD1502 Process control instruction detail error code Process control instruction detail error code Shows the detailed error contents for the error that occurred in the process control instruction S Error New SD1503 Process control instruction generated error l...

Страница 877: ...A SYSTEM B The LED status for BACKUP CONTROL SYSTEM A SYSTEM B is stored in the following format S status change New QnPRH SD1588 Reason s for system switching Reason s for system switching that occurred in host station Stores the reason s for system switching on the host system The following values are stored corresponding to the methods for system switching Initialized to 0 when the power supply...

Страница 878: ...h request network No Request source network No Stores the request source at work No when the SM1590 is turned on S Error New Q4AR Network module head address whichrequested system switching Network module head address which requested system switching Stores head address of network module which a system switch request was initiated Turns off automatically by system after network error is reset by u...

Страница 879: ...cation Error information classification Stores the error comment information individual information classification code Refer to SD4 for the storage status S Each END SD4 SD1605 Error common information Error common information Stores the common information for the error code Refer to SD5 to SD15 for the storage status SD5 SD1605 SD6 SD1606 SD7 SD1607 SD8 SD1608 SD9 SD1609 SD10 SD1610 SD11 SD1611 ...

Страница 880: ... SD0 SD1611 Other system diagnostic error occurrence time Diagnostic error occurrence time Stores the date and time when diagnostics error occurred corresponding to error code stored in SD1610 Data format is the same as SD1 to SD3 Also stores the value to SD1 to SD3 S Every END SD1 to SD3 SD1612 SD1613 SD1614 Other system error information category Error information category code Stores the catego...

Страница 881: ...connected Tracking cable is disconnected or damaged S Every END QnPRH SD1690 Network module head address whichrequested system switching on host control system Network module head address which requested system switching on host control system Stores head address of network module which a system switch request was initiated using the following format Turns off automatically by system after network...

Страница 882: ...ystem CPU module starts If no online program change request is issued to the standby system CPU module within the preset time after completion of the online program change to the control system CPU module both system CPU modules judge it as the failure of the online program change for redundancy In this case both system CPU modules resume the consistency check between system A B suspended during t...

Страница 883: ...y END New SD1782 Momentary power failure detection counter for power supply 1 1 Momentary power failure detection count for power supply 1 Counts the number of times of momentary power failure of the power supply 1 2 Monitors the status of the power supply 1 2 mounted on the redundant power main base unit Q38RB and counts the number of times of momentary power failure Status of power supply 1 powe...

Страница 884: ...omment 0001H I O assignment Type 0400H Section 4 7 Section 9 1 1 8 Section 9 1 2 10 Model name points Start XY Start I O No Basic setting Base model name 0401H Section 4 4 Section 9 1 1 8 Section 9 1 2 10 Power model name Extension cable Slots Detail setting Error time output mode 0403H Section 6 8 Section 9 1 1 8 Section 9 1 2 10 I O response time 0405H Section 6 7 Section 9 1 1 8 Section 9 1 2 1...

Страница 885: ...h speed RUN PAUSE contact RUN 1001H Section 6 6 1 Section 9 1 1 2 Section 9 1 2 2 PAUSE Section 6 6 2 Section 9 1 1 2 Section 9 1 2 2 Remote reset 1002H Section 6 6 3 Section 9 1 1 2 Section 9 1 2 2 Output mode at STOP to RUN 1003H Section 6 4 Section 9 1 1 2 Section 9 1 2 2 Floating point arithmetic processing 1004H Section 3 9 4 Section 9 1 2 2 Common pointer No 1005H Section 10 10 2 Section 9 1...

Страница 886: ...etting System interrupt setting High speed interrupt setting X Input 100FH Section 3 1 3 Section 6 22 Section 9 1 2 2 Y Output 1010H Buffer read 1011H Buffer write 1012H Service processing setting 1013H Section 6 25 2 Latch data backup operation enabled contact 1014H Section 6 29 File register 1100H Section 9 1 2 3 Section 10 7 Comment file used in a command 1101H Section 9 1 2 3 Initial Device va...

Страница 887: ...2 5 WDT watchdog timer setting WDT setting 3000H Section 3 2 Section 9 1 1 4 Section 9 1 2 4 Initial execution monitoring time Section 3 3 1 Section 9 1 2 4 Low speed execution monitoring time Section 3 3 3 Section 9 1 2 4 Error check Carry out battery check 3001H Section 6 17 Section 9 1 1 4 Section 9 1 2 4 Carry out fuse blown check Verify module Check device range at indexing Diagnose redundant...

Страница 888: ... Latch 2 start end 2005H Indexing setting of ZR device 2000H Section 9 1 2 6 Memory check 3008H Section 9 1 2 5 Detail setting Hardware error time PLC operation mode 4004H Section 6 9 Section 9 1 1 8 Nunber of modules on MELSECNET H 5000H Section 9 3 2 Valid module during other station access 5001H Interlink transmission parameters 5002H Routing parameters 5003H Starting I O No 5NM0H Network No To...

Страница 889: ... 7 Section 9 1 2 9 Start condition 8003H Output mode when the block is stopped 8005H Nunber of Ethernet 9000H Section 9 3 3 Starting I O No 9N00H Network No Group No Station No Operational settings Initial settings 9N01H Section 9 3 3 Open settings 9N02H Router relay parameter 9N03H Station No IP information 9N05H FTP parameters 9N06H E mail settings 9N07H News setting 9N08H Interrupt settings 9N0...

Страница 890: ...ter RWr Remote register RWw Ver 2 remote input RX Ver 2 remote output RY Ver 2 remote register RWr Ver 2 remote register RWw Special relay SB Special register SW Operational settings CNM2H All connect count Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Standby master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay information setting Station information setting Remote device station initial ...

Страница 891: ...03H Signal flow memory tracking setting Device detail settings Tracking block No Do auto forward Tracking block No 1 Auto ON SM1520 Device range settings File register file settings Group setting D004H Section 9 3 1 Section 9 3 2 Section 9 3 3 Redundant settings D5 H Section 9 3 2 D9 H Section 9 3 3 DA H Section 9 3 1 Communication area setting refresh setting E002H E003H Section 9 1 2 11 Section ...

Страница 892: ...tions that can be used with the CPU module change depending on the function version serial No Appendix 4 1 Basic model QCPU Upgrade 1 Specification comparison Usable compatible Unusable incompatible TableApp 40 Specification comparison Specifications First 5 digits of serial No of CPU Module Function Version A Function Version B 04121 or earlier 04122 or later Standard RAM capacity Q00JCPU Q00CPU ...

Страница 893: ...1 or earlier Version 8 00A or later Structured text ST language QCPU Q Mode Programming Manual Structured Text MELSAP3 QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC B 04122 or later PID operation function 1 QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions Real number operation 1 Section 10 13 3 Intelligent function module event interruption Section 6 23 Device initial value automatic set...

Страница 894: ...ut output modules to be installed 16 modules 24 modules Power supply module Main base unit Unnecessary Necessary Slim type main base unit Unnecessary Necessary Extension base unit Q52B Q55B Unnecessary Q63B Q65B Q68B Q68RB Q 612B Necessary Extension cable QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B Memory card interface No External interface RS 232 Yes transmission rate 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps 57 6kbps...

Страница 895: ...rade 1 Specification comparison Usable compatible Unusable incompatible TableApp 43 Specification comparison Specifications First 5 digits of Serial No of CPU Module Function Version A Function Version B 02091 or earlier 02092 or later 02112 or later 03051 or later 04012 or later Standard RAM capacity Q02CPU 64kbyte Q02HCPU 64kbyte 128kbyte Q06HCPU 64kbyte 128kbyte Q12HCPU 64kbyte 256kbyte Q25HCPU...

Страница 896: ...em 03051 or later Version 7 10L or later High speed interrupt Section 6 22 04012 or later Version 8 or later Compatibility with index modification for module designation of dedicated instruction Selection of refresh item for COM instruction SFC program online batch change Section 6 12 2 04122 or later Version 8 or later File memory capacity change Section 5 4 4 CC Link remote network additional mo...

Страница 897: ...e serial No Compatible GX Developer Selection of trailing edge instruction execution non execution at online change Section 6 12 3 B 07092 or later Version 8 27D or later Block guarantee function of CC Link cyclic data per station CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual Details 08032 or later Version 8 32J or later CC Link 8 setting compatible parameters CC Link System Master Local Module...

Страница 898: ...rogram memory check function Section 9 1 2 5 Version 8 23Z or later Read of the SFC activity step comment compatible QCPU Q mode QnACPU programming manual SFC Manual Error detection in the redundant power supply system Version 8 23Z or later Clock data in 1 1000 sec units compatible Section 6 5 Storage of sampling trace files in standard RAM Section 6 14 Version 8 23Z or later Individual setting o...

Страница 899: ...mpatible GX Developer Read of the SFC activity step comment compatible QCPU Q mode QnACPU programming manual SFC D 07032 or later Clock data in 1 1000 sec units compatible Section 6 5 Storage of sampling trace files in standard RAM Section 6 14 Version 8 23Z or later Selection of trailing edge instruction execution non execution at online change Section 6 12 3 07092 or later Version 8 27D or later...

Страница 900: ... later Setting of whether to use local device for each program Section 10 14 2 10012 or later Version 8 62Q or later Program batch transfer status confirmation function SM165 compatible Section 5 2 3 Multiple CPU high speed transmission dedicated instruction compatible 1 QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Amount of battery consumption display QCPU User s Manual Hardware Desi...

Страница 901: ...r the compatibility with the Universal model QCPU and software need to be upgraded for the communication with the Universal model QCPU are described in Appendix 5 2 Appendix 5 2 Multiple CPU system To configure a multiple CPU system CPU modules compatible with the Universal model QCPU shall be used CPU modules compatible with the Universal model QCPU are described in Appendix 5 2 Appendix 5 2 In a...

Страница 902: ...eckbox for Check device range at indexing on the PLC RAS setting tab of PLC parameter so that checking is not performed Section 6 17 Program execution type Low speed execution type programs are not supported Use scan execution type programs or fixed scan execution type programs Section 3 3 3 A program execution type cannot be changed by remote operation Use instructions for switching program execu...

Страница 903: ...ed Section 7 18 8 in the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions File usability setting for each program The following file usability setting for each program is not available 1 File register Device initial value Comment When file usability is set modify the program as described in Appendix 5 4 Section 3 3 6 Appendix 5 4 and Appendix 5 4 I O refresh setting for each program I O r...

Страница 904: ...PLC parameter select standard ROM for the transfer destination Note however that the transfer destination of program is fixed to program memory Setting by DIP switches is not necessary Section 5 2 8 and Section 5 2 9 TableApp 51 Precautions for replacement and replacement methods External communication Item Precautions Replacement method Reference Module service interval time read The module servi...

Страница 905: ...gs at the execution of the specified step at the rising falling edge of bit devices when the value of word devices coincide with the setting value at every specified time settable range 1ms to 5000ms Section 6 11 1 and Section 6 14 Scan time measurement with GX Developer 3 Time required for executing a part of the program cannot be measured using the scan time measurement function 1 Calculate the ...

Страница 906: ...atch clear cannot be performed by the switch Latch clear can be performed by the remote latch clear operation of GX Developer Section 4 4 in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection The system protect cannot be set by the switch Data in the files can be protected by setting a password for each file Password for each file can be registered with GX Developer Section 6 19 The...

Страница 907: ...ming Manual SFC An operation mode at transition to active step cannot be selected Fixed to TRANSFER Section 4 7 6 in the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC SFC program for program execution management SFC programs for program execution management are not supported Section 5 2 3 in the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC SFC control instruction Some SFC control instructions are not sup...

Страница 908: ...is 10012 or later MES interface module QJ71MES96 The serial number first five digits is 09042 or later The serial number first five digits is 10012 or later The serial number first five digits is 10012 or later TableApp 57 Devices need to be replaced Personal computer board Product Model Universal model QCPU compatible dedicated software package version 1 Used with Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU or Q0...

Страница 909: ... GX Developer or GOT accesses the CPU module on another station via the MELSECNET H module controlled by another CPU 4 The access target on another station is A QnA series CPU module TableApp 59 Devices need to be replaced Network module and serial communication module Product Model Universal model QCPU compatible module version Used with Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU or Q06UDCPU Used with Q13UDHCPU ...

Страница 910: ...ured with Q13UDHCPU Q26UDCPU or Built in Ethernet port QCPU Motion CPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU No restrictions No restrictions Use the multiple CPU high speed main base unit Q3 DB for a main base unit PC CPU module PPC CPU852 MS Driver S W PPC DRV 02 version 1 01 or later Driver S W PPC DRV 02 version 1 02C or later High Performance model QCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Function version B or...

Страница 911: ...QADU E Version 2 05F or later 1 Version 2 05F or later 2 Version 2 05F or later 3 GX Configulator DA SW2D5C QDAU E Version 2 06G or later 1 Version 2 06G or later 2 Version 2 06G or later 3 GX Configulator SC SW2D5C QSCU E Version 2 12N or later 1 Version 2 12N or later 2 Version 2 17T or later 3 GX Configulator CT SW0D5C QCTU E Version 1 25AB or later 1 Version 1 25AB or later 2 Version 1 25AB or...

Страница 912: ...played on GOT Comment data can be output to a display device in the replacement program of the PR instruction after reading data using the reading device comment data instruction COMRD P CHKST Specific format failure check instruction Instructions can be replaced using a replacement program Appendix 5 3 4 CHK CHKCIR Format change instruction for CHK instruction Failure detection ladder patens can ...

Страница 913: ...5 Modify programs as needed AND TRn OR TRn LDI TRn ANDI TRn ORI TRn LD BLm TRn AND BLm TRn OR BLm TRn LDI BLm TRn ANDI BLm TRn ORI BLm TRn SCHG D Active step change instruction Refer to Appendix 3 Restrictions and alternative method of the Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU in the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC SET TRn Transition control instruction Refer to Appendix 3 Restrictio...

Страница 914: ... in the High Performance model QCPU Replacing instructions is not necessary The Q02UCPU does not support alternative instructions listed in TableApp 66 TableApp 66 Instructions need to be replaced Symbol Instruction description Symbol of alternative instruction S P DDWR Write other CPU device data into host CPU D P DDWR S P DDRD Read other CPU device data into host CPU D P DDRD S P SFCS Request of...

Страница 915: ...ple of the IX and IXEND instructions A replacement example of program using the IX and IXEND instructions is shown below Since index registers are saved using the ZPUSH instruction a 23 word index register save area is required a Example of device assignment If the device numbers in the example above are used for other applications assign unused device numbers instead b Program before replacement ...

Страница 916: ...tting the contents of index modification table to index registers Replace the IXEND instruction with the ZPOP instruction Figure App 2 Sample program Current index register is saved Contents of the index modification table are set to the index registers Z0 to Z15 Modification target No change required The saved index register is restored Transition from the IXEND instruction Transition from the IX...

Страница 917: ...exadecimal constants H when setting values in the index modification table 2 Start I O numbers U are expressed in hexadecimal Use hexadecimal constants H when setting values in the index modification table 3 Devices B W X or Y can be specified following J Set device numbers for B W X and Y as device offset values of each device in the index modification table For example if J10 Y220 is specified b...

Страница 918: ...cement Figure App 4 Sample program Figure App 5 Sample program The device offset values for input X output Y internal relay M data register D link register W and pointer P are set to the index modification table starting from D0 The device offset values specified by the IXDEV and IXSET instructions are set to the index modification table starting from D0 ...

Страница 919: ...replacement Application Device Application Device Output string D0 to D3 Output string D0 to D3 ASCII code output signal Y100 to Y107 ASCII code output signal Y100 to Y107 Strobe signal Y108 Strobe signal Y108 In execution flag Y109 In execution flag Y109 Output string storage address BIN32 D20 to D21 Output string storage address BIN32 Used for sub routine programs and interrupt programs D200 to ...

Страница 920: ...r the CALL instruction Y device Y100 in the program before replacement shown in b cannot be specified directly as output Y number with the CALL instruction Specify the output Y number in integer An interrupt program is used to output character codes via the output module Enable the execution of interrupt program using the EI instruction Figure App 7 Program execution Figure App 8 Sample program FE...

Страница 921: ... the fixed scan interrupt program is turned ON Specify the following arguments for the subroutine program First argument Output string storage address Input Second argument Output module start Y number Input Figure App 9 Sample program Data specified by the CALL P arguments are saved Output string storage address Number of output strings Output module start number Devices used for the string outpu...

Страница 922: ...ing signals are all turned OFF when all strings are output Yn0 to Yn7 ASCII code Yn8 strobe signal Yn9 in execution flag Status 0 One character is extracted from the output string using the MIDR instruction and output to the Y module The strobe signal is turned OFF for 10ms Status 1 The strobe signal is turned ON for 10ms Status 2 The strobe signal is turned OFF for 10ms The status value is increm...

Страница 923: ...tion Device Application Device Advance end detection sensor input 1 X100 Advance end detection sensor input 1 X100 Retract end detection sensor input 1 X101 Retract end detection sensor input 1 X101 Advance end detection sensor input 2 X102 Advance end detection sensor input 2 X102 Retract end detection sensor input 2 X103 Retract end detection sensor input 2 X103 Advance end detection sensor inpu...

Страница 924: ...e CHK instruction In the program before replacement shown in b four CALL instructions shall be added since there are four check conditions in front of the CHK instruction Device number and contact number of X devices check condition are specified in each CALL instruction Contact number is used to display failure number when a failure is detected Figure App 11 Sample program Figure App 12 Program e...

Страница 925: ... the subroutine program d Replacement method when failure detection ladder patterns are changed by the CHKCIR and CHKEND instructions Failure detection ladder patterns can be changed in the subroutine program described in C First argument Device number of X device targeted for failure check Input Second argument Contact number of X device targeted for failure check Input Figure App 14 Sample progr...

Страница 926: ...ore replacement After replacement Application Device Application Device Numeric input execution instruction M0 Numeric input execution instruction M0 Input complete flag M1 Input complete flag M1 Input data area D200 to D203 Input data area D200 to D203 ASCII code input signal X100 to X107 ASCII code input signal X100 to X107 Strobe signal X108 Strobe signal X108 Input data area address BIN32 D210...

Страница 927: ... so that a subroutine program is called In the subroutine program input codes are added to the input data area and the completion status is checked Transfer the following data to the subroutine program at the execution of the CALL instruction ASCII code input value from the input module Xn0 to Xn7 Number of digits to be input Indirect address of the input data area Use the ADRSET instruction to ac...

Страница 928: ...ice turned ON when input is completed Output Figure App 18 Sample program Numeric entry is ended when the at completion ON signal is ON or 0DH is input Addresses of the input data area are saved in the work devices The 1st to 4th digit numerals in input data area 2 are shifted for one digit to the left Numeral entered in ASCII code is converted into one numeral in BIN data using the HABIN instruct...

Страница 929: ...be performed either in single precision or double precision depending on the data Therefore Perform internal arithmetic operations in double precision on the PLC system setting tab of PLC parameter cannot be set in the Universal model QCPU Because of this new function operation results both in single precision and double precision slightly differ between the High Performance model QCPU and the Uni...

Страница 930: ...tion Floating point data addition E P ED P Floating point data subtraction E P ED P Floating point data multiplication E P ED P Floating point data division E P ED P Data conversion Conversion from BIN 16 bit data to floating point data FLT P FLTD P Conversion from BIN 32 bit data to floating point data DFLT P DFLTD P Conversion from floating point data to BIN 16 bit data INT P INTD P Conversion f...

Страница 931: ...e precision and double precision floating point data TableApp 73 Advantages and disadvantages when using the double precision floating point operation instructions Advantage Disadvantage The results are more accurate than those of the single precision floating point operation instructions The instruction processing speed is slower than that of the single precision floating point operation instruct...

Страница 932: ...bers for storing floating point data need to be reassigned Example Replacing the floating point operation A to B C Changing all floating point data into double precision 1 Device assignment 2 Program before replacement 3 Program after replacement TableApp 75 Device assignment Before replacement After replacement Application Device Data type Application Device Data type Data A D0 to D1 Floating poi...

Страница 933: ...ble precision using the double precision floating point operation instructions Operation results are converted from double precision to single precision using the EDCON instruction A program example that floating point data are converted mutually between single precision and double precision before and after operations is shown below Example Replacing the floating point operation A B C Using the E...

Страница 934: ...DICES 3 Program after replacement Figure App 23 Sample program Floating point data are converted from single precision to double precision Operation is performed using double precision floating point data The floating point operation result data are converted from double precision to singe precision ...

Страница 935: ...am are minimized but the processing for calling subroutine programs increases the scan time In addition since conversions from double precision to single precision are performed for each instruction rounding off errors generated during operations are larger than those in the replacement program described in b Example Replacing the floating point operation A B C Using a subroutine program 1 Device ...

Страница 936: ...l model QCPU APPENDICES 3 Program after replacement Figure App 25 Sample program A subroutine program for multiplication using the double precision floating point operation instruction A subroutine program for addition using the double precision floating point operation instruction ...

Страница 937: ...l model QCPU Those invalid data are considered to be stored in the following cases The same device is used for storing floating point data and other data such as binary values BCD values and strings Use different devices for storing floating point data and data other than floating point data Floating point data externally written are invalid Take measures on the external source side so that valid ...

Страница 938: ...PERATION ERROR error code 4140 is not detected even if a special value is stored in D100 Example 3 DetectinganOPERATIONERROR errorcode 4140 intheANDE instruction Ladder mode List mode In the ladder block starting from the step 104 the ANDE instruction of the step 106 and the OR instruction of the step 110 shall not be executed when the M101 valid data flag is OFF However if the M90 is ON in the LD...

Страница 939: ...tion for connecting the contact of the valid data flag and the floating point data comparison instruction Make sure that there is no line OR connection between the valid data flag and the floating point data comparison instruction Modification example 1 Modification example 2 Before modification After modification E D100 E10 E D100 E200 E D100 E10 E D100 E200 Valid data flag Valid data flag Valid ...

Страница 940: ...examples after modification for Example 1 and 3 in 1 are shown below Example 4 ProgramaftermodificationforExample1 AnOPERATIONERROR error code 4140 is no longer detected Ladder mode List mode Example 5 ProgramaftermodificationforExample3 AnOPERATIONERROR error code 4140 is no longer detected Ladder mode List mode ...

Страница 941: ... are the devices whose data can be latched by batteries The Universal model QCPU has file registers of larger capacities than the High Performance model QCPU offering a high speed file registers processing If many device points are to be set for latching it is advisable to use the file registers TableApp 78 shows capacities of file registers for each CPU module 1 Use of a memory card can increase ...

Страница 942: ...will be 28 6 s If a shorter scan time is needed remove unnecessary latch device points to minimize the latch range 2 Latch range specification of a file register R ZR does not increase the scan time 4 How to shorten the scan time When data to be latched are stored in a file register R or ZR the processing time is shorter than that for latching internal user device Example Reducing thenumber oflatc...

Страница 943: ...Program setting tab of PLC parameter File register Device initial value Comment Local device b Universal model QCPU In the Universal model QCPU the following file usability for each program cannot be set on the Program setting tab of PLC parameter 1 If the file usability is set in the High Performance model QCPU change the setting as described below 1 The local device file usability setting is not...

Страница 944: ...al value or comment which uses the same name as the program from the target memory The Universal model QCPU executes a program without using a program file if no program file that uses the same name as the program exists in the target memory Use the following file is selected No change in parameter setting is required Operation of the Universal model QCPU is the same regardless of the file usabili...

Страница 945: ...erformance model QCPU The parameter valid drive is specified at the switches on the front panel of the High Performance model QCPU b Universal model QCPU The Universal model QCPU automatically determines the parameter valid drive depending on the existence of parameters in the drive program memory memory card or standard ROM Therefore when replacing the High Performance model QCPU with the Univers...

Страница 946: ...from the standard ROM Move the programs and parameters with boot setting into the program memory from the standard ROM 1 Delete all settings for parameter on the Boot file setting tab of PLC parameter Contents of boot file setting No boot file setting for parameters Change the setting so that the Universal model QCPU can refer to the parameters in the memory card and programs shall be booted from ...

Страница 947: ... drive is set to the standard ROM Continue Setting in High Performance model QCPU Setting in Universal model QCPU Boot file setting of PLC parameter Contents of boot file setting Delete all settings for data other than program and parameter in the boot file setting Since these data can be used even not stored in the program memory it is not necessary to transfer them to the program memory Or chang...

Страница 948: ...Contents of boot file setting No changes are required Contents of boot file setting No boot file setting for parameters Change the setting so that programs are stored in the program memory in the first place instead of booting from the standard ROM Move the programs targeted for booting from the standard ROM into the program memory 1 Delete all settings for program on the Boot file setting tab of ...

Страница 949: ...Continue Setting in High Performance model QCPU Setting in Universal model QCPU Boot file setting of PLC parameter Contents of boot file setting Delete all settings for data other than program and parameter in the boot file setting Since these data can be used even not stored in the program memory it is not necessary to transfer them to the program memory Or change the setting so that they are sto...

Страница 950: ...QCPU whose serial number first five digits is 10041 or earlier does not support the forced ON OFF function of external I O External I O can be forcibly turned ON OFF using the replacement program described below 2 Method of replacing High Performance model QCPU with Universal model QCPU As shown in Figure App 28 add programs SETX and SETY on the Program setting tab of PLC parameter The following t...

Страница 951: ... Module Appendices Index Example Forcibly turning X40 X77 and X7A ON and X41 and Y7B OFF The programs SETX and SETY turns ON or OFF the X and Y devices which have been registered for forced ON OFF using the forced ON OFF function of external I O at each scan using the SET and RST instructions High Performance model QCPU Universal model QCPU Program example of SETX Program example of SETY 1 2 3 4 5...

Страница 952: ...the COM instruction P10 and P11 are pointers shown in the program examples in 2 When SM775 is ON Executes refresh set by SD778 and also the 0 bit of SD778 is OFF Do not execute I O refresh replacement of the instruction is not necessary a Program before replacement b Program after replacement Selection of refresh processing during COM instruction execution Selection of refresh processing during CO...

Страница 953: ...uded addition of subroutine calls for P10 and P11 is not necessary a When partial refresh for input X is executed by the RFS instruction Add a subroutine call that executes forced input after the RFS instruction b When partial refresh for output Y is executed by the RFS instruction Add a subroutine call that executes forced output before the RFS instruction 5 Restrictions Replacements described in...

Страница 954: ...iversal model QCPU always stores the largest mounted I O number in SD250 The operation of this relay is not necessary Delete the corresponding parts SM255 MELSECNET H module 1 information Indicates operative network or standby network These are special relays for the simple dual structured network function Since the Universal model QCPU does not support this function there is no application for th...

Страница 955: ...n type programs SM420 and SM424 SM431 User timing clock No 6 for low speed execution type programs SM432 User timing clock No 7 for low speed execution type programs SM433 User timing clock No 8 for low speed execution type programs SM434 User timing clock No 9 for low speed execution type programs SM510 Low speed execution type program executing flag The Universal model QCPU does not support low ...

Страница 956: ... speed scan counter The Universal model QCPU does not support low speed execution type programs Delete the corresponding part or replace it with the special register for scan execution type programs SD420 SD510 Low speed execution type program number The Universal model QCPU does not support low speed execution type programs Delete the corresponding part or replace it with the special register for...

Страница 957: ...U and measures to be taken Continue Number Name Description Measures to be taken SD720 Program No specification for PLAODP instruction The Universal model QCPU does not support the PLAODP instruction Delete the corresponding part SD1780 1 Power supply OFF detection status The Universal model QCPU does not store redundant power supply system information in SD1780 to SD1783 Delete the corresponding ...

Страница 958: ...n external device using the fixed buffer of the Ethernet module Without procedure No procedure Communication using random access buffer Reads writes data from in the random access buffer of the Ethernet module from to multiple external devices Data communication sending receiving by e mail Sends receives data by e mail Sending receiving e mail by the CPU module Sending receiving e mail using the C...

Страница 959: ...ort setting Enables communication after the station in which an Ethernet module is mounted has been powered ON Open close processing for communication by a sequence program is not required Remote password check Prevents unauthorized access to the CPU module by users in remote locations Simultaneous broadcast Sends receives data for all external devices on the same Ethernet where the Ethernet modul...

Страница 960: ...ected by setting MELSOFT connection for user connections in PLC parameter 6 MELSOFT transmission port corresponds to GX Developer transmission port of the QJ71E71 100 7 Up to 17 MELSOFT products can be connected by setting MELSOFT connection for user connections including one system connection in Network parameter 8 The Built in Ethernet port QCPU does not support the connection with MX Component ...

Страница 961: ...0 GX Developer A 0 CC Link IE controller network or MELSECNET H Ethernet or MELSECNET H GX Developer A 0 GX Developer B0 GX Developer A0 GX Developer B1 GX Developer A1 GX Developer A 1 GX Developer A 1 GX Developer A5 GX Developer A3 GX Developer B3 G4 A3 GOT A3 GX Developer B5 GX Developer A6 GX Developer B6 SW PVC CCPU C0 B0 A0 B0 A0 A0 A0 B0 QnUDE H CPU C Controller module Ethernet module or M...

Страница 962: ... A series CPU Remark For GOT accessible to the CPU module refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual TableApp 87 Access availability Access source Access target QnUDE H CPU A0 QnUDE H CPU B0 QnUCPU A1 PC CPU module B1 3 QnHCPU A2 QnHCPU B2 QnHCPU A3 QnHCPU B3 QnHCPU A4 QnHCPU B4 QnHCPU A5 QnHCPU B5 QnHCPU A6 QnHCPU B6 QnUDE H CPU A7 C Controller module C0 GX Developer...

Страница 963: ...unpacking or repacking while Mitsubishi ships products with packages to comply with the transport regulations Also contact the transporters TableApp 88 List of models for restricted tranportation Product name Model Product supply status Classification for transportation Battery Q8BAT Lithium battery Dangerous goods Battery Q8BAT SET Lithium battery with Q8BAT connection cable Battery Q7BAT Lithium...

Страница 964: ...2048 points Output relay Y 16 2k 2048 points Y0000 to 07FF 16 128 words 1 2048 points Internal relay M 10 k points M0 to 16 words 1 points Latch relay L 10 k points L0 to 16 words 1 points Link relay B 16 k points B0000 to 16 words 1 points Annunciator F 10 k points F0 to 16 words 1 points Link special relay SB 16 1k 1024 points SB0000 to 03FF 16 64 words 1 1024 points Edge relay V 10 k points V0 ...

Страница 965: ...it points 2 Input relay X 16 8k 8192 points X0000 to 1FFF 16 512 words 1 8192points Output relay Y 16 8k 8192 points Y0000 to 1FFF 16 512 words 1 8192points Internal relay M 10 k points M0 to 16 words 1 points Latch relay L 10 k points L0 to 16 words 1 points Link relay B 16 k points B0000 to 16 words 1 points Annunciator F 10 k points F0 to 16 words 1 points Link special relay SB 16 2k 2048 point...

Страница 966: ...ts 1 2 Restriction check Number of points Number Capacity words 3 Number of bit points 2 Input relay X 16 8k 8192 points X0000 to 1FFF 16 512 words 1 8192points Output relay Y 16 8k 8192 points Y0000 to 1FFF 16 512 words 1 8192points Internal relay M 10 k points M0 to 16 words 1 points Latch relay L 10 k points L0 to 16 words 1 points Link relay B 16 k points B0000 to 16 words 1 points Annunciator...

Страница 967: ... ports of CPU module 7 1 Concept of I O assignment 4 25 Constant scan 2 1 2 4 2 8 2 12 2 16 6 5 Control method 2 1 2 4 2 8 2 12 2 16 Counter C 10 36 Count processing 10 36 Resetting the counter 10 38 Counter C 2 2 2 5 2 9 2 13 2 17 CPU module A 37 CPU shared memory 2 1 2 4 2 8 2 12 2 16 D D Extended data register 10 84 Data clear processing 3 70 Data register D 10 43 Data register D 2 2 2 5 2 9 2 ...

Страница 968: ...g the SRAM card 5 35 Formatting the standard RAM 5 9 Memory card clear 5 35 Formatting necessities 5 2 FTP 7 23 FTP operation commands 7 31 Function devices FX FY FD 10 49 Function input FX 2 3 2 7 2 11 2 15 2 19 Function List 6 1 Function output FY 2 3 2 7 2 11 2 15 2 19 Function register FD 2 3 2 7 2 11 2 15 2 19 FX Function input devices 10 49 FY Function output devices 10 49 G GOT A 39 GX Conf...

Страница 969: ... 2 2 6 2 10 2 14 2 17 Link special relay SB 10 26 Link special relay SB 2 2 2 6 2 10 2 14 2 17 List mode 3 4 Local device Local device monitor 6 54 10 116 Local pointer 10 93 Low speed END processing 3 40 Low speed execution type program 3 36 Low speed execution watch time 3 41 Low speed program execution time 3 36 Low speed retentive timer 10 31 Low speed scan time 3 41 Low speed timers 10 29 M M...

Страница 970: ... unit A 38 Refresh mode 3 73 Remote latch clear 6 34 Remote operation 6 23 Remote password 6 150 Remote PAUSE 6 27 Remote RESET 6 30 Remote RUN STOP 6 23 Resetting Resetting the counter 10 38 Retentive timer ST 2 2 2 5 2 9 2 13 2 17 RUN status 3 66 RUN PAUSE contact 2 3 2 7 2 11 2 15 2 19 S S Step relay 10 28 Sampling Trace 6 104 SB Link special relay 10 26 Scan execution type program 3 33 Scan ti...

Страница 971: ...ion device 10 108 U3En G Common device for multiple CPU 10 61 U G Intelligent Function Module Device 10 59 Universal model QCPU A 37 Upgrade Basic model QCPU upgrade App 103 High Performance model QCPU Upgrade App 106 Process CPU Upgreade App 109 Redundant CPU Upgrade App 110 Universal model QCPU Upgrade App 111 User memory area 6 80 User setting system area 5 4 5 21 V V Edge relay 10 23 VD Macro ...

Страница 972: ...Index 6 Memo ...

Страница 973: ...ed not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service O...

Страница 974: ...n in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation VxWorks Tornado WindPower WindSh and WindView are registered trademarks of Wind River Systems Inc Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective owners SH NA 080484ENG M ...

Страница 975: ......

Страница 976: ......

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для Q00CPU

Бренд: XBOX Страницы: 4

Бренд: Wavetec Страницы: 17

Бренд: Calsense Страницы: 9

Smart Controller

Бренд: MaestroHome Страницы: 10

SolarCell Remote

Бренд: Samsung Страницы: 2

Бренд: Febco Страницы: 12

Бренд: GameSir Страницы: 8

Бренд: Game ready Страницы: 21

Бренд: VAMP Страницы: 304

Бренд: Tactical Страницы: 8

Бренд: Jabra Страницы: 4

Бренд: U-Prox Страницы: 3

Бренд: Ziton Страницы: 36

CPX-AP-A-16DI-D-M12-5P

Бренд: Festo Страницы: 16

Бренд: Watlow Страницы: 20

Бренд: ECKELMANN Страницы: 147

Бренд: Squizz Страницы: 24

Бренд: EVERSPRING Страницы: 3

Бренды по названию

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды